ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF USER GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF USER MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF OWNER GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF OWNER MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF REFERENCE GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF INSTRUCTION GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF REFERENCE MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF MANUAL

If this is not the document you want for this product, click here to see if we have any other documents for this product.

ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF SUMMARY:

What is the “Quick Start” manual? The “Quick Start” manual explains basic procedures for using the SC-880.

What is the “Owner’s Manual”? The “Owner’s Manual” explains the functions for each mode.

How can I find the desired chapter? Use the table of contents, index, and quick reference of displays to find the desired chapter.

What important sections should be carefully read? The sections entitled “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” “USING THE APPARATUS SAFELY” and “IMPORTANT NOTES” provide crucial information concerning the proper operation of the unit.

How are the names of panel buttons represented in this manual? The names of panel buttons are enclosed in square brackets: [ ].

What does “[PERFORM]” mean? [PERFORM] means the PERFORM button.

What does “[PERFORM]-[TONE]-[EDIT]” mean? This means that you should press the PERFORM button, then the TONE button, and finally the EDIT button.

How are references to other pages in the manual indicated? Other pages in the manual that you might want to refer to for further information are shown like this: (p. **).

What precautions should be taken when using electric products? When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:

  • Read all the instructions before using the product.
  • Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, or the like.
  • This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.
  • This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
  • The product should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
  • The product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat.
  • The product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the product.
  • The power-supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time.
  • Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
  • The product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
    • The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
    • Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; or
    • The product has been exposed to rain; or
    • The product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or
    • The product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
  • Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel.

What are the grounding instructions for the USA? This product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or breakdown, grounding provides a path of least resistance for electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock. This product is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.

What is the danger associated with improper grounding? Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the product – if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.

What are the grounding instructions for the U.K.? This apparatus must be earthed. The wires in this mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code. GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE As the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the colored markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

  • The wire which is colored GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
  • The wire which is colored BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or colored BLACK.
  • The wire which is colored BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or colored RED. The product which is equipped with a THREE WIRE GROUNDING TYPE LINE PLUG must be grounded.

What do the WARNING and CAUTION notices indicate? The WARNING symbol is used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly. The CAUTION symbol is used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly.

What does material damage refer to? Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings, as well to domestic animals or pets.

What do the symbols within the triangle indicate? The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings. The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.

What does the symbol with a circle and a line through it indicate? The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled.

What does the symbol with a black dot in a circle indicate? The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

What precautions should be taken before using this unit? Before using this unit, make sure to read the instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.

Can I open the unit or make internal modifications? Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit.

What precautions should be taken when using the unit with a rack or stand? When using the unit with a rack or stand recommended by Roland, the rack or stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain stable. If not using a rack or stand, you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly support the unit, and keep it from wobbling.

What precautions should be taken with the power cord? Avoid damaging the power cord. Do not bend it excessively, step on it, place heavy objects on it, etc. A damaged cord can easily become a shock or fire hazard. Never use a power cord after it has been damaged.

What precautions should be taken in households with small children? In households with small children, an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit.

Should the unit be protected from strong impact? Protect the unit from strong impact. (Do not drop it!)

What precautions should be taken when connecting the unit to a power outlet? Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be especially careful when using extension cords–the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating (watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through.

What should be done before using the unit in a foreign country? Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor.

How should the power-supply cord be handled? Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.

What precautions should be taken with cords and cables? Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children.

Can I climb on top of or place heavy objects on the unit? Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit.

Can I handle the power cord or plugs with wet hands? Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.

What should be done before moving the unit? Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from external devices.

What should be done before cleaning the unit? Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet.

What precautions should be taken during lightning storms? Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet.

What are the main features of the SC-880?

  • Supports General MIDI System/GS Format: The SC-880 is a sound module compatible with the General MIDI system. It can be used to play back any music files (General MIDI scores) bearing the General MIDI logo. The SC-880 is also compatible with the Roland GS format. It can be used to play back any music files bearing the GS logo.
  • Sound Generator with a Generous 32 Parts/ 64 Voices: The SC-880 is a 32-part, 64-voice multitimbral sound module. A single SC-880 can produce the sounds of a large ensemble. It is the ideal sound module to use with sequencers or personal computers.
  • Rich Variety of High-Quality Tones: The SC-880 contains 1,117 high-quality tones and 42 types of Rhythm sound set (including 3 sound effects sets). These sound include the same sounds as the SC-55/55mkII and SC-88/88 Pro, allowing SC-55/55mkII and SC-88/88 Pro song data to be played back correctly.
  • Full Complement of Effects: A wide variety of effects are provided: 64 types of multi-effects, eight types each of reverb and chorus effects, 10 types of delay, and a 2-band equalizer. In addition, the values of relevant parameters can be set for each effect, allowing professional-level manipulation of sound.
  • Create Your Own Sounds: There are 256 user tones and 16 user Rhythm sets, allowing you to create your own tones and Rhythm sets.
  • By editing sound parameters such as vibrato, filter, and envelope, you can modify sounds to your taste.
  • Patch Mode Lets You Create Complex Sounds: The SC-880 provides a Patch mode, which lets you layer up to 6 parts to create complex sounds.
    • 256 different immediately usable patches are provided, making the SC-880 ideal as an expansion tone module for your keyboard.
    • You can create 128 different user patches, and play using your own original sounds.
  • Performance Mode Lets You Enjoy Ensemble Playing Immediately: The SC-880 provides a Performance mode, which remembers the settings for all 32 parts.
    • You can use the 8 different performances immediately to assist you in creating songs.
    • You can also create 8 user performances which contain your own original settings.
  • Phrase Preview Function for Easy Auditioning: The SC-880’s Phrase Preview function makes it easy to audition tones or patches. A phrase appropriate for the selected patch or tone will be played. This feature comes in handy when you want to check out a sound, or have a quick listen while editing.
  • Enhanced Visibility Display: The large display graphically provides easy visual confirmation of settings, such as the volume for each part.
  • Direct Connection to Your Computer: The computer connector allows the SC-880 to be directly connected to a personal computer.
  • Easy Connection to Other Devices: Audio input jacks with input level adjustment allow you to connect another sound generator, and output that sound mixed with the SC-880’s own sound from the audio output jacks. Additionally, two sets of output jacks are provided.

What is the General MIDI system? The General MIDI system is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound-generating devices. Sound-generating devices and music files that meet the General MIDI standard bear the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance.

What is the GS Format? The GS Format is Roland’s set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound-generating devices. In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI System, the highly compatible GS format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI System, Roland’s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it performs GS Music Files (music files that have been created with the GS Format in mind).

Can the SC-880 play back music files with General MIDI or GS format? This product supports both the General MIDI system and the GS format, and can be used to play back music files carrying either of these logos.

What power supply precautions should be taken?

  • Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise (such as an electric motor or variable lighting system).
  • Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers or other devices.

What placement precautions should be taken?

  • Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move it further away from the source of interference.
  • This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.
  • Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.

What are the maintenance instructions?

  • For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
  • Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.

What should I be aware of regarding repairs and data? Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should always be backed up in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer), or written down on paper (when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.

How does the memory backup work? This unit contains a battery which powers the unit’s memory circuits while the main power is off. When this battery becomes weak, the message shown below will appear in the display. Once you see this message, have the battery replaced with a fresh one as soon as possible to avoid the loss of all data in memory. To have the battery replaced, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor. “Battery Low”

What are some additional precautions?

  • Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against the risk of losing important data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit’s memory in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer).
  • Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer) once it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.
  • Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
  • Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
  • When connecting/ disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector itself-never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal elements.
  • A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation.
  • To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially when it is late at night).
  • When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box (including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.

What can I connect to the PHONES jack? A pair of stereo headphones can be connected to this jack. Make sure that they have an impedance of 8-150 ohms.

What does the Display show? The Display shows a variety of information.

What is the function of the CURSOR Button and VALUE Dial?

  • Use these to move the cursor in the display, or to select pages.
  • Use the VALUE Dial to modify the value of a setting. If you press the dial as you rotate it, the value will change more rapidly.
  • In some cases, you can press the dial to view various lists in the display.

What is the function of the VOLUME Knob? This adjusts the volume of the OUTPUT 1 jack and PHONES jack. When pressed, the Phrase Preview function is activated, allowing the SC-880 to produce sound by itself.

What is the function of the RHYTHM Button? The RHYTHM Button is for selecting Rhythm Sets.

What is the function of the TONE Button? The TONE Button is for selecting Tones.

What is the function of the PATCH Button? The PATCH Button is for selecting Patches.

What is the function of the PERFORM Button? The PERFORM Button is for selecting Performances.

What is the function of the PART Button? The PART Buttons provide selection of parts. The currently selected part will be shown in the Part field in the upper left of the display.

What is the function of the M-FX Button? The M-FX Button is for selecting Multi-effects.

What is the function of the EDIT Button? The EDIT Button is pressed to enter the Edit mode.

What is the function of the SYSTEM Button? The SYSTEM Button is pressed to enter the System mode, where you can make settings for the sound generator.

What is the function of the WRITE Button? The WRITE Button is for saving the tones, patches, performances, rhythms, or multi-effects that you’ve created.

What is the function of the INFO Button?

  • The INFO Button is pressed to view a variety of information.
  • The indicator of the [INFO] button also functions as a MIDI message indicator which lights when a MIDI message is received.

What is the function of the POWER Switch? The POWER Switch turns the power on/off.

What is the function of the EXIT Button? Use the EXIT Button to return to the basic screen, or to cancel a list that is shown in the display.

What is the function of the ENTER Button?

  • The ENTER Button is pressed to get the changes you’ve made in a value to take effect.
  • If the cursor is located at a parameter, you can press [ENTER] to transmit the setting of that parameter as a MIDI message.

What is the function of the UTILITY Button? The UTILITY Button is pressed to enter the Utility mode, where you can save or initialize settings; and copy, delete, or exchange parts.

What messages are received by the MIDI IN B Connector? Messages that are input here will be received by MIDI parts B01-B16. The Input Mode setting will determine whether part group A or part group B will receive messages.

What messages are received by the MIDI IN A Connector? Messages that are input here will be received by MIDI parts A01-A16. The Input Mode setting will determine whether part group A or part group B will receive messages.

What is the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU Connector? This connector functions either as MIDI OUT or MIDI THRU, depending on the setting of MIDI OUT/THRU Select. When the SC-880 is shipped, this is set to MIDI OUT.

What should be connected to the AC Inlet? Connect the supplied power cable here.

What is the function of the Computer Connector Switch? Set this switch depending on the type of computer connected to the Computer connector, or the software you are using. Turn the power off before changing the setting of this switch. If you want to use the MIDI connectors, set this switch to MIDI.

What is the function of the Computer Connector? A special computer cable (sold separately) can be connected here. The type of cable required will depend on your computer. When the Computer switch located at the left is set to MIDI, the computer connector cannot be used.

What is the function of the OUTPUT 2 Jacks? These provide output of the direct sound, unprocessed by the effects. At the factory settings, all sound will be output from these jacks. The sound from OUTPUT 2 is output at a fixed volume, unaffected by the position of the volume knob.

What is the function of the INPUT Jacks? The INPUT Jacks accept input of audio from an external device. If you are using this for a monaural signal, use the L (MONO) INPUT jack.

What is the function of the OUTPUT 1 Jacks? Provide output of stereo audio signals (L/R) that can be sent to an amp or mixer. For monaural output, connect to the L jack alone.

What is the function of the INPUT VOLUME Knob? Adjusts the volume of the audio signals input to the INPUT jacks.

What does Chapter 1, “Overview of the SC-880”, explain? This chapter explains the basic organization of the SC-880, the display and basic operation, and the various modes.

What does Chapter 2, “Patch Mode Settings”, explain? This chapter explains how a patch is organized, the parameters and operations used when editing a patch, Tone mode, and Rhythm mode.

What does Chapter 3, “Performance Mode Settings”, explain? This chapter explains how a performance is organized, and how to edit a performance.

What does Chapter 4, “Applying Special Effects to the Sound (System Effects)”, explain? This chapter explains how the effects of the SC-880 are organized, and the operations and parameters used to edit the system effects.

What does Chapter 5, “Applying Special Effects to the Sound (Multi-Effects)”, explain? This chapter explains the various types of multi-effects, and the operations and parameters used to edit multi-effects.

What does Chapter 6, “Setting Up Your Preferences”, explain? This chapter explains how you can make various settings that affect the operating environment of the SC-880.

What does Chapter 7, “Utility Mode Settings”, explain? This chapter explains how you can save data on an external device and perform convenient operations such as copying settings, etc.

What does Chapter 8, “MIDI and the SC-880”, explain? This chapter explains the MIDI messages that the SC-880 can use.

What does Chapter 9, “Using a Personal Computer to Control the SC-880”, explain? This chapter explains how the SC-880 can be connected to a personal computer.

Where can I find information about troubleshooting? If you run into problems, refer to “Troubleshooting” to make sure that the settings are correct. If an error message appears during operation, refer to “If a Message Appears” and take appropriate action. This section also provides information related to sound editing, MIDI, various lists, and the MIDI implementation charts.

How is the sound generator organized?

  • The SC-880’s Basic Unit of Sound: the Tone
  • Combining Tones to Create Sounds: Patches
  • Playing Rhythm Instruments: Rhythm Sets
  • Playing an Ensemble: Performance
  • Applying Special Effects to the Sound: Effects

What is the SC-880’s basic unit of sound? The Tone.

How are patches created? Patches are created by combining tones.

What are Rhythm Sets? Rhythm Sets are used to play rhythm instruments.

What is a Performance? A Performance represents playing an ensemble.

How are special effects applied to the sound? Special effects are applied to the sound using Effects.

What are the memory areas of the SC-880?

  • Memory for Storing Overall Settings: System Memory
  • Memory for Playing and Editing: Temporary Area
  • Rewritable Memory: User Memory
  • Non-Rewritable Memory: Preset Memory

What is System Memory used for? System Memory is used for storing overall settings.

What is the Temporary Area used for? The Temporary Area is used for playing and editing.

What is User Memory? User Memory is rewritable memory.

What is Preset Memory? Preset Memory is non-rewritable memory.

What are the SC-880’s Modes?

  • Performance Mode
  • Patch Mode
  • Tone Mode
  • Rhythm Mode
  • Multi-Effects Mode
  • System Mode
  • Utility Mode

What is Performance Mode? Performance Mode is a mode on the SC-880.

What is Patch Mode? Patch Mode is a mode on the SC-880.

What is Tone Mode? Tone Mode is a mode on the SC-880.

What is Rhythm Mode? Rhythm Mode is a mode on the SC-880.

What is Multi-Effects Mode? Multi-Effects Mode is a mode on the SC-880.

What is System Mode? System Mode is a mode on the SC-880.

What is Utility Mode? Utility Mode is a mode on the SC-880.

What is displayed in the Upper Part of the Display? The upper part of the display shows information such as the mode and the name of the selected tone, patch, performance, etc., as well as the tempo and beat.

What does the PART Display show? The PART display shows the volume level and pan position of each part, as well as the mute and solo status.

What are pages? The data contained in the lower part of the display may not fit on a single screen. In such cases, it will be divided into pages.

How do I select pages? Use the [ ] CURSOR buttons to select pages. The currently selected page number is shown in the upper right corner of the display. For example, “1/2” indicates that you’re looking at page 1 of 2.

What is the function of the [INFO] button? When you press the [INFO] button, the lower part of the display shows detailed information about the parameter at which the cursor is currently located. When you press the [EXIT] button, or press the [INFO] button a second time, the previous screen will reappear.

What is the function of the [WRITE] button? The [WRITE] button lets you save the data that you’ve edited. When you press the [WRITE] button, a screen for saving the data will appear. If you select “OK,” the data will be saved.

How are tones assigned to parts? A tone is selected for each of the SC-880’s 32 parts. For example, if you select a piano tone for part 1, then part 1 will produce a piano sound when you play the keyboard.

How can I make Variation Tone Settings? The tone selected for a part can also have a “variation” applied to it. For example, if you’ve selected a trumpet tone, you can apply a variation that makes the sound brighter or adds a mute effect.

How are Tone and Variation numbers read? The tone number and variation number are displayed in the lower part of the screen. These numbers can be changed by using the VALUE dial to select the desired tone or variation.

What is the MIDI Channel of a Part? The sounds of a sound module are controlled via MIDI messages. MIDI messages are transmitted on “channels.” A total of 16 channels are available. The SC-880 can simultaneously receive MIDI messages on all 16 channels. Each part is assigned a MIDI channel for receiving MIDI messages.

Which MIDI IN will be used by each Part? The SC-880’s parts can be divided into two groups (A and B) of 16 parts each, and each group can be set to receive data from a different MIDI IN connector (MIDI IN A or MIDI IN B). This means that you can use two external sequencers, etc. to control the SC-880. At the factory settings, both groups A and B receive data from MIDI IN A. You can change the MIDI IN assignment in the System mode’s “MIDI IN” screen.

How are Polyphony and Voices related? When playing back multi-part MIDI data (such as from a sequencer), you’ll want the sounds of as many parts as possible to sound simultaneously. This is called “polyphony.” The SC-880 is a 64-voice sound module, meaning that up to 64 notes can sound simultaneously.

How do Legato-Enabled Sounds work? Some tones are “legato-enabled.” This means that when you play legato phrases on the keyboard, the notes will be connected smoothly, with no break in the sound. However, when such tones are used, the number of voices that can sound simultaneously will be reduced by half (to a maximum of 32 voices).

What is Patch Mode? A patch is a sound created by combining up to six parts (tones), and setting parameters for each part, such as volume, pan, etc. The SC-880 has 384 preset patches (p. 166) and 128 user patches, for a total of 512 patches. You can switch between patches while playing, to dramatically change the sound.

How do I select a Patch? 1. Press the [PATCH] button. 2. Use the VALUE dial to select the desired patch. 3. Press the [ENTER] button.

How do I save a Patch? 1. Press the [WRITE] button. The Write screen will appear. 2. Use the VALUE dial to select “Patch.” 3. Press the [ENTER] button. The Save Patch screen will appear. 4. Select the desired user patch number using the VALUE dial. 5. Press the [ENTER] button to save the patch.

How do I save a Patch as a Performance? 1. While in Patch mode, press the [WRITE] button. 2. Use the VALUE dial to select “Performance.” 3. Press the [ENTER] button. 4. Select the desired user performance number using the VALUE dial. 5. Press the [ENTER] button to save the patch as a performance.

How do I create a Patch (Patch Edit Mode)? To edit a patch, you first need to enter Patch Edit mode. 1. Select the patch you want to edit (p. 21). 2. Press the [EDIT] button to enter Patch Edit mode.

How do I name a Patch? 1. Move the cursor to the “Name” field. 2. Use the VALUE dial to select the desired characters. 3. Press the [ENTER] button.

How do I make settings that affect all parts? 1. Use the [ ] CURSOR buttons to move the cursor to “Common Edit.” 2. Press the [ENTER] button.

What are the settings for each part?

  • Settings for the Output of Each Part.
  • MIDI-Related Settings for Each Part
  • Settings that Determine How a Part Will Sound

What are the settings for the output of each part?

  • Output Select: This determines whether the part’s sound will be output from OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2 (p. 24).
  • Volume: This adjusts the volume of the part.
  • Pan: This adjusts the pan (left/right) position of the part.
  • Chorus Send Level: This adjusts the amount of the chorus effect that will be applied to the part.
  • Reverb Send Level: This adjusts the amount of the reverb effect that will be applied to the part.
  • Delay Send Level: This adjusts the amount of the delay effect that will be applied to the part.
  • M-FX Send Level: This adjusts the amount of the multi-effect that will be applied to the part.

What does Output Select determine? This determines whether the part’s sound will be output from OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2.

What does Volume adjust? This adjusts the volume of the part.

What does Pan adjust? This adjusts the pan (left/right) position of the part.

What does Chorus Send Level adjust? This adjusts the amount of the chorus effect that will be applied to the part.

What does Reverb Send Level adjust? This adjusts the amount of the reverb effect that will be applied to the part.

What does Delay Send Level adjust? This adjusts the amount of the delay effect that will be applied to the part.

What does M-FX Send Level adjust? This adjusts the amount of the multi-effect that will be applied to the part.

What are the MIDI-Related Settings for each Part?

  • Bank Select: Selects the bank from which tones can be selected. (p. 18)
  • Tone Select: Selects the tone number.
  • Variation: Selects the variation for the tone.
  • Receive Channel: This setting determines which MIDI channel the part will receive data on. (p. 18)
  • Key Range: This lets you specify the lowest and highest notes that the part will respond to. (p. 26)
  • Velocity Range: This lets you specify the lowest and highest velocity values to which the part will respond. (p. 26)

What does Bank Select do? Selects the bank from which tones can be selected.

What does Tone Select do? Selects the tone number.

What does Variation select? Selects the variation for the tone.

How do I rapidly increase the PART value?

Hold down PART [ ► ] and press PART [ ◄ ].

How do I rapidly decrease the PART value?

Hold down PART [ ◄ ] and press PART [ ► ].

How do I use the VALUE dial to Change Pages?

  1. Press [PATCH]-[TONE]-[EDIT] (the indicators light).
  2. Use CURSOR [ ↑ ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Press VALUE dial.
  4. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the menu name.
  5. Press [ENTER] or the VALUE dial to move to the selected page.

How do I use CURSOR [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to change pages?

  1. Press [PATCH]-[TONE]-[EDIT] (the indicators light).
  2. Make sure that the cursor is located at the menu name. If it is not located at the menu name, press CURSOR [ ↑ ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Use CURSOR [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to change pages.

How do I set the volume of each part?

  1. Press [PATCH]-[TONE]-[EDIT] (the indicators light).
  2. Use CURSOR [ ↑ ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Rotate the VALUE dial to select “Output.”
  4. Use CURSOR [ ↓ ] to move the cursor to “Level.”
  5. Press [INFO].
  6. Use PART [ ◄] [ ►] to select the part whose settings you wish to modify.
  7. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.
  8. Repeat steps 6-7 to make settings for all 32 parts.

How do I assign tones to parts?

  1. Press [PATCH] (the indicator lights).
  2. Rotate the VALUE dial to select “P-000 SC-880.”
  3. Press [TONE] (the indicator lights).
  4. Use PART [ ◄] [ ►] to select the part for which you wish to make tone settings.
  5. Use CURSOR [ ◄] [ ► ] to move the cursor to the tone number.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the tone that you wish to assign to each part.

How do I select tones while viewing the bar indicator in Tone Mode?

Press [INFO]

How do I use the Tone Finder Function?

  1. Press [TONE] (the indicator lights).
  2. Press the VALUE dial.
  3. Rotate the VALUE dial to select “Category,” and press the VALUE dial.
  4. A tone in the chosen category is selected.

How do I cancel my selection in the Tone Finder function and return to TONE MODE?

Press [EXIT]

How do I use the Same Sounds as the SC-88 or SC-55/SSmkII ?

  1. Press [PATCH] (the indicator lights).
  2. Rotate the VALUE dial to select “P-000 SC-880.”
  3. Press [TONE] (the indicator lights).
  4. Use CURSOR [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to move the cursor to the tone set number.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the tone set.

What are the tone sets that can be selected on the SC-880?

  • Tone Set 1: The same sounds as the SC-55/55Mk2.
  • Tone Set 2: The same sounds as the SC-88.
  • Tone Set 3: The original tone set of the SC-880.

How do I make variation tone settings?

  1. Press [PATCH] (the indicator lights).
  2. Rotate the VALUE dial to select “P-000 SC-880”.
  3. Press [TONE] (the indicator lights).
  4. Use PART [ ◄ ] [ ►] to select the part for which you wish to make tone settings.
  5. Use CURSOR [ ◄ ] [ ►] to move the cursor to the Variation number.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the Variation number.

How do I change the MIDI channel of a part?

  1. Press [PATCH]-[TONE] (the indicators light).
  2. Use PART [ ◄] [ ►] to select the part whose settings you wish to change.
  3. Press [EDIT] (the indicator lights).
  4. Use CURSOR [ ↑ ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  5. Select “Rx MIDI,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  6. Use CURSOR [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] to move the cursor to “Receive Channel.”
  7. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the Channel.

How do I try out legato-enabled sounds?

  1. Press [PATCH]-[TONE] (the indicators light).
  2. Use CURSOR [ ► ] to move the cursor to the variation number.
  3. Rotate the VALUE dial to select " 000/041 Violin."
  4. Try out one of these Patches to hear how it works.

How do I sound the attack portion each time when using legato-enabled sounds?

Release your finger from a key before playing the next note.

How do I select a patch on the SC-880?

On the SC-880, you can select from 256 different patches: Preset patches P-001-P128, and User patches U-001-U128. Preset patches have a “P” before their number, while user patches have a “U”.

  1. Press [PATCH] (the indicator lights).
  2. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the patch. If you hold down the VALUE dial while you rotate it, the patch number will change in steps of 10.

How do I save a patch?

Patches that you create can be saved as one of 128 user patches U-001-U128.

  1. Edit the patch.
  2. Press [WRITE] (the indicator lights).
  3. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  4. Select “Patch Write,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  5. Use CURSOR [ , ] to move the cursor to the user patch number.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the user patch number at which you wish to save the data. User patches can be saved in the 128 patches U-001-U-128.
  7. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to save the patch. If you decide not to save, press [EXIT].
  8. Press [ENTER] to save the user patch.

How do I save as a performance?

You can save your settings as a performance which includes the patch. Settings for parts A01-A06 of the selected patch, effects (system effects and multi-effects), and part settings for parts A07-B16 can be saved as a user performance. The user performance that you saved can be selected from Performance mode.

  1. Carry out the editing in patch mode.
  2. Press [WRITE] (the indicator lights).
  3. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  4. Select “Performance Write,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  5. Use CURSOR [ , ] to move the cursor to the user performance number.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the user performance number at which you wish to save the data. User performances can be saved in the 8 performances U-1-U-8.
  7. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to save the user performance. If you decide not to save, press [EXIT].
  8. Press [ENTER] to save the user performance.

How do I create a patch (Patch Edit Mode)?

To create a patch, you must assign a tone to each part of the patch, make settings for each part, and make effect settings. In Patch Edit mode, you can make settings for all parts and for the effects (system effects and multi-effects).

To enter Patch Edit mode, press [EDIT] from Patch mode. Parameters in Patch Edit mode are set using the following procedure.

  1. Press [PATCH] (the indicator lights).
  2. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the patch that you wish to edit.
  3. Press [EDIT] (the indicator lights).
  4. Use CURSOR [ ▲ ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the page.
  6. Use CURSOR [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to select the parameter whose value you wish to change.
  7. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.

What are the pages in the Patch Edit mode?

Patch Edit mode contains pages with the following menu names.

  • Patch Name
  • Master Control
  • Reverb
  • Chorus
  • Delay
  • Equalizer
  • Multi-FX

How do I name a patch?

In the “Patch Name” page you can assign a name of up to 16 characters to a user patch.

  1. Edit the patch.
  2. Press [EDIT] (the indicator lights). Enter the patch edit mode.
  3. Use CURSOR [ ▲ ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  4. Select “Patch Name,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  5. Press CURSOR [ ▼ ] to move the cursor to the patch name.
  6. Use CURSOR [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to move the cursor to the character that you wish to change.
  7. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired character. The following characters can be selected: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, &#!?.,:;"‘*±l<=>O[]_l$%@¥’-><-
  8. Repeat steps 6-7 to input the name.
  9. When you finish inputting the name, press [EXIT] to exit Patch Edit mode.

When you finish inputting the name, press [WRITE] to save the data as a User patch. If you do not save the settings as a User patch, the name you input will be lost.

How do I make settings that affect all parts?

In the “Master Control” page, you can make settings for the following parameters which affect all parts.

  • Level
  • Pan
  • Master Tune
  • Key Shift

How do I set the volume level?

This parameter adjusts the volume of all the parts. As the displayed value increases, the volume will increase. The basic volume level of this entire unit is adjusted by the Volume knob. If the volume knob is at minimum position, there will be no sound even if you increase this parameter.

Level: 0-127 (Master Level)

How do I set the pan (stereo location)?

This parameter sets the Pan (stereo position) for all the parts. As the displayed L value increases the sound will move further left, and as the R value increases the sound will move further right.

Pan: L63-0-R63 (Master Pan)

How do I match the pitch to another instrument?

When you are playing in an ensemble with other instruments or need to set the SC-880 to match the pitch of another instrument, adjust the Master Tune setting. The displayed value (e.g., 440.0 Hz) indicates the frequency of the A4 note’s pitch (note number 69).

Master Tune: 415.3-466.2 Hz

How do I set the pitch of the sound?

Key Shift adjusts the pitch of the sound in semitone steps. For example, if you were playing back song data from a sequencer, you could use the Key Shift parameter to change the key of the song without changing the sequencer settings. Or, if you are singing along with sequence data, you can adjust Key Shift to move the song to the key most comfortable for your voice. As the displayed value rises (falls) one step, the pitch will rise (fall) one semitone. This means that 12 steps equal one octave.

Key Shift: -24-0-+24

What is Tone Edit Mode?

In Tone Edit mode you can edit the settings for each part and the tone or rhythm set that is assigned to each part. Use PART [ ◄] [► ]to select the part that you wish to set. The current part will be shown in the PART field of the display.

How do I set the parameters of each part?

Use the following procedure to set the parameters of each part.

  1. Press [PATCH]-[TONE]-[EDIT] (the indicators light). You will enter Tone Edit mode.
  2. Use PART [ ◄) [ ►) to select the part for which you wish to make settings.
  3. Use CURSOR [ ! ) to move the cursor to the menu name.
  4. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the pages for which you wish to make settings.
  5. Use CURSOR [ ! ] [ f ] [ ◄] [ ►] to select the parameter that you wish to modify.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.

What are the pages in the Tone Edit mode?

Tone Edit mode contains pages with the following menu names:

  • Output
  • Effect Send
  • Rx MIDI
  • Mode
  • Keyboard Range
  • Pitch
  • Scale Tune
  • Part Tone Modify
  • USER TONE
  • Modulation
  • Bender
  • Channel After
  • Poly After
  • CC1
  • CC2

How do I set the output of each part?

In the “Output” page, you can make the following settings related to the output of the part.

  • Level
  • Mute
  • Pan
  • Velocity Depth
  • Velocity Offset
  • OUT Assign

How do I set the volume level for each part?

This parameter adjusts the volume of each part. Higher values result in a louder sound.

Level: 0-127 (Part Level)

How do I mute a part?

This function allows you to mute the sound of a specific part so that it will not be heard. When “MUTE” is turned On, the part shown in the upper left of the display will be muted. For example, you can use a sequencer to play back a recorded ensemble, and mute one of the parts so you can play that part yourself. The lowest dot on the bar display indicates the mute on/off status of each part. The dot will be off for parts for which Part Mute is turned on.

Mute: On/Off (Part Mute)

How do I set the pan (stereo location) for each part?

Pan refers to the position in the stereo field. For example, you might place the drum set and bass in the center, the guitar at the right, and the keyboard at the left. To place the sound in the center, set this value to 0. As the L-number increases the sound will move further to the left, and as the R-number increases the sound will move further to the right. With a setting of “Rnd” (random), each note will be placed at an unpredictable location.

Pan: Rnd, L63-0-R63 (Part Pan)

How do I set the relation between keyboard dynamics and loudness?

The force with which you play a note on MIDI keyboard is transmitted as MIDI Velocity data. Strongly played notes will have a higher velocity value. The Velocity Depth and Velocity Offset parameters determine the relation between the force of your keyboard playing and the loudness of the sound that results.

If Velocity Depth is increased, small differences in your playing dynamics will make a large difference in the loudness of the sound. If Velocity Depth is decreased, even large differences in your playing dynamics will make only a small difference in the loudness of the sound.

If Velocity Offset is set higher than 64, even softly played notes (i.e., notes with a low velocity) will be sounded loudly. If Velocity Offset is set lower than 64, even strongly played notes (i.e., notes with a high velocity) will be sounded softly.

Velocity Depth: 0-127 Velocity Offset: 0-127

How do I set the output destination?

Specifies the output jack from which the sound of each part will be output.

  • OUT-1: The sound together with the effect sound will be output in stereo from the OUTPUT 1 jacks.
  • OUT-2: The direct sound without the effect sound will be output in stereo from the OUTPUT 2 jacks.
  • OUT-2L: The direct sound without effects will be output from the OUTPUT 2L jack. (The Pan setting will have no effect.)
  • OUT-2R: The direct sound without effects will be output from the OUTPUT 2R jack. (The Pan setting will have no effect.)

OUT Assign: OUT-1/OUT-2/OUT-2UOUT-2R

How do I set MIDI-related settings for each part?

In the “Rx MIDI” page you can make the following MIDI-related settings for each part.

  • Receive Channel
  • CC1 Number
  • CC2 Number
  • Bank
  • Bank L
  • NRPN
  • RPN
  • PC
  • cc Mod
  • Bend
  • CAI
  • PAI
  • Volume
  • Panpot
  • Expres
  • Hold-1
  • Porta
  • Soste
  • Soft

How do I set the MIDI receive channel setting?

This sets the MIDI receive channel of the part.

Receive Channel: A01-A16, A–, B01-B16, 8–

How do I set the controller numbers?

Specifies the controller numbers that will be used when controlling the CCI and CC2 parameters via MIDI. For example, if you set CCI Number to 16, the value of an incoming MIDI controller number 16 message will affect the sound as specified by the setting of the CCI parameter.

CC1 Number: 1-95 CC2 Number: 1-95

How do I restrict MIDI reception?

The “Rx MIDI” page provides the following parameters, which allow the reception of MIDI messages to be tailored in various ways.

  • Bank,
  • Bank L,
  • NRPN,
  • RPN,
  • PC,
  • CC,
  • Mod,
  • Bend,
  • CAI,
  • PAf,
  • Volume,
  • Panpot,
  • Expres,
  • Hold-1,
  • Porta,
  • Soste,
  • Soft

How do I use the Bank Select Receive switch?

To remotely select the SC-880’s sounds from another MIDI device, you can send Bank Select messages and Program Change messages to the SC-880. If Bank is turned on, these MIDI messages can select Variation tones and User tones. If this parameter is turned off, bank select messages will be ignored, meaning that MIDI messages cannot select Variation tones or User tones (they will select Capital tones). For details on using MIDI messages to select tones, refer to p. 110 of the PDF.

Bank: On/Off (Rx Bank Select)

How do I use the Rx Bank Select LSB?

When you wish to switch the SC-880’s tone sets from another MIDI device, set the lower byte of the Bank Select message to specify the desired tone set. When at “Bank: On,” a setting of “Bank L” On will cause the tone set to be selected by the lower byte of the bank select message. A setting of “Bank L” Off will cause the lower byte of the bank select message to be ignored, so that MIDI messages will not change the tone set. When at “Bank: Off,” the lower byte of the bank select message will be ignored regardless of when “Bank L” is turned On/Off, so that MIDI messages will not change the tone set.

Bank L: On/Off (Rx Bank Select LSB)

How do I use the Rx NRPN?

NRPN (Non-registered Parameter Number) messages allow you to modify vibrato, filter and envelope values via MIDI. If Rx NRPN is on, these sound parameters can be modified by MIDI messages. If Rx NRPN is off, this will not be possible.

NRPN: On/Off (Rx NRPN)

How do I use the Registered Parameter Numbers (RPN)?

RPN (Registered Parameter Numbers) are used when you wish to use MIDI messages to modify the Pitch Bend Sensitivity, Master Fine Tuning, or Master Coarse Tuning values. If RPN is On, MIDI messages can be used to modify the values of these parameters. If this is Off, MIDI messages cannot be used to modify the values of these parameters.

RPN: On/Off

How do I use Program Change messages?

Program Change messages can be used to remotely switch the tones of the SC-880 using another MIDI device. If “PC” is On, program change messages can be used to select tones. If “PC” is Off, program change messages will be ignored, so it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to select tones.

PC: On/Off

How do I use Control Change messages?

Control Change messages can be used to control the modulation, pan, etc., of the SC-880 from another MIDI device. If “CC” is On, control change messages can be used to control modulation or pan, etc. If “CC” is Off, control change messages will be ignored, so it will not be possible to control modulation or pan, etc., regardless of the On/Off settings of “Mod,” “Volume,” “Panpot,” “Exprs,” “Hold 1,” “Porta,” “Sosten,” or “Soft.”

CC:On/Off

How do I control the vibrato of the SC-880 from another device?

To control the vibrato of the SC-880 from another device, use control change number 1. When “Mod” is turned On, control change number 1 will adjust the depth of the vibrato. If “Mod” is turned Off, control change number 1 will be ignored, so that it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to adjust the vibrato depth.

Mod: On/Off

How do I convey the bender lever (or pitch bend wheel) movements of another device to the SC-880?

To convey the bender lever (or pitch bend wheel) movements of another device to the SC-880, use pitch bender messages. When “Bend” is turned On, pitch bender messages will convey movements of the bender level. When “Bend” is turned Off, pitch bender messages will be ignored, so that it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to convey movements of the bender level. The result of the bender level movements will depend on the setting of the “Bender” page.

Bend: On/Off

How do I convey channel aftertouch (channel pressure) usage on another device to the SC-880?

To convey channel aftertouch (channel pressure) usage on another device to the SC-880, use channel pressure messages. When “CAf” is turned On, channel pressure messages will convey the amount of pressure that is applied to an external keyboard. When “CAf” is turned Off, channel pressure messages will be ignored, so it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to convey the usage of aftertouch. The result of the aftertouch will depend on the setting of the “Channel After” page.

CAf: On/Off

How do I convey polyphonic aftertouch (polyphonic key pressure) usage on another device to the SC-880?

To convey polyphonic aftertouch (polyphonic key pressure) usage on another device to the SC-880, use polyphonic key pressure messages. When “P Af” is turned On, polyphonic key pressure messages will convey the amount of pressure that is applied to an external keyboard. When “PAf” is turned Off, polyphonic key pressure messages will be ignored, so that it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to convey aftertouch usage. The result of the aftertouch will depend on the setting of the “Poly After” page.

PAf: On/Off

How do I control the part volume of the SC-880 from another device?

To control the part volume of the SC-880 from another device, use control change number 7 messages. When “Volume” is turned On, control change number 7 can be used to set the volume. When “Volume” is turned Off, control change number 7 will be ignored, so that it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to set the volume.

Volume: On/Off

How do I control the part pan of the SC-880 from another MIDI device?

To control the part pan of the SC-880 from another MIDI device, use control change number 10 messages. When “Panpot” is turned On, control change number 10 can be used to set the pan. When “Panpot” is turned Off, control change number 10 will be ignored, so that it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to set the pan.

Panpot: On/Off

How do I control the part expression of the SC-880 from another MIDI device?

To control the part expression of the SC-880 from another MIDI device, use control change number 11 messages. When “Exprs” is On, control change number 11 can be used to adjust the expression. When “Exprs” is Off, control change number 11 will be ignored, so that it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to control expression.

Expres: On/Off

How do I convey damper pedal movements from another device to the SC-880?

To convey damper pedal movements from another device to the SC-880, use control change number 64. When “Hold 1” is On, control change number 64 can be used to convey damper pedal movements. When “Hold 1” is Off, control change number 64 will be ignored, so that it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to convey damper pedal movements.

Hold-1: On/Off

How do I switch the SC-880’s portamento effect from another MIDI device?

To switch the SC-880’s portamento effect from another MIDI device, use control change number 65. When “Porta” is On, control change number 65 can be used to apply portamento. When “Porta” is Off, combination number 65 will be ignored, so that it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to apply portamento.

Porta: On/Off

How do I convey sostenuto pedal movements from another device to the SC-880?

To convey sostenuto pedal movements from another device to the SC-880, use control change number 66. When “Sosten” is On, control change number 66 can be used to convey sostenuto pedal movements. When “Soste” is Off, control change number 66 will be ignored, so that it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to convey sostenuto pedal movements.

Soste: On/Off

How do I convey soft pedal movements from another device to the SC-880?

To convey soft pedal movements from another device to the SC-880, use control change number 67. When “Soft” is On, control change number 67 can be used to convey soft pedal movements. When “Soft” is Off, control change number 67 will be ignored, so that it will not be possible to use MIDI messages to convey soft pedal movements.

Soft: On/Off

How do I determine how a part will sound?

In the “Mode” page you can make settings for the following parameters:

  • Part Mode
  • Mono/Poly Mode
  • Assign Mode

In the “Keyboard Range” page you can make settings for the following parameters.

  • Low
  • High

In the “Pitch” page you can make settings for the following parameters.

  • Key Shift
  • Fine Tune

In the “Scale Tune” page you can make settings for the following parameters.

  • C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B

How do I specify the Part Mode?

For parts playing conventional instrument sounds, select Norm (Normal mode). For parts playing percussion or drums, select Rhythm 1 or Rhythm 2. Rhythm Parts play a different sound (Instmment) for each MIDI note number. In other words, a single part can play many different percussion instrument sounds (Rhythm set list). The Rhythm 1 and Rhythm 2 Parts allow you to simultaneously use two Rhythm sets. For example, if Rhythm Parts are set as shown below, when you change the STANDARD 1 Rhythm set of Part AlO to the TR-808, the selection for Part Al2 will also change to TR-808. For details on how to assign a Rhythm set to a part, refer to p. 33 of the PDF.

Part Name (Part Mode) Name of Rhythm set
Part A10 (Rhythm1) STANDARD 1
Part A11 (Rhythm 2) JAZZ
Part A12 (Rhythm 1) STANDARD 1

Part Mode: Normal/Rhythm 1/Rhythm 2

How do I specify how the tone will sound?

If a part is set to Mono (Mono Mode), that part will play only one note at a time. It is effective to select Mono Mode for parts that are playing a naturally monophonic instrument such as a trumpet or sax. Select Poly Mode for parts that are playing chords.

Mono/Poly Mode:Mono/Poly

How do I specify how simultaneously played notes will sound?

The “Assign Mode” setting specifies how notes will sound when the same key is played two or more times in an overlapping way. If “Assign Mode” is set to Single, notes played on a key (note number) that is already sounding will cause the older note to be silenced, and the new note will sound in its place. For the rhythm part, a setting of Single is the default setting. If “Assign Mode” is set to Lmtd Multi (Limited Multi), notes played on a key (note number) that is already sounding will produce the impression that the notes are overlapping, but the number of voices that will actually sound will be limited to fewer than the actual number of times that the key was pressed. For normal parts, Lmtd Multi is the default setting. If “Assign Mode” is set to Full Multi, repeated notes on the same key will use as many voices as the number of times that the key was actually repeated.

Assign Mode: Single/Lmtd Multi/Full Multi

How do I specify the range in which notes will sound?

The Key Range parameters determine the pitch range over which the instrument will be sounded. Keyboard Range Low (the lowest note) and Keyboard Range High (the highest note) will determine the range of notes that will sound. These values are displayed as key names. You can specify a value between C-1 and G9 (0-127), and middle C is C4 (60). For example, if you assign two parts to the same MIDI channel and set the Keyboard Range of one to C-1-B3 and the other to C4-G9. Then you could assign different sounds to each part, and play two different sounds on either side of C4. Or, you could set the keyboard ranges of two parts to overlap, and layer the two sounds.

Low: C-1-G9 High: C-1-G9

Note Name MIDI note number
C-1-A0 0-21
C1-C2 24-36
C3-C4 48-60
C5-C6 72-84
C7-C8 96-108
G9 127

How do I transpose?

This parameter transposes the part. As the value increases (decreases) the pitch will rise (fall) in steps of a semitone. 12 steps make a difference of 1 octave. With a setting of 0 the pitch will not be affected.

Key Shift: -24-0-+24

How do I make fine adjustments to the pitch?

Use this parameter when you wish to make fine adjustments to the tuning of a part. Positive ( +) settings will raise the pitch, and negative(-) settings will lower the pitch. If two or more parts are set to the same MIDI channel and the same tone, you can spread their Fine Tuning settings apart to add rich depth and breath to the sound.

Fine Tune: -100.0-+ 100.0 cent

How do I specify the pitch of each note in the octave?

Scale Tuning is a parameter that makes fine adjustments to the pitch of each note in the octave. These settings are for one octave of notes, and will simultaneously adjust the pitch of that note in all octaves. By using Scale Tuning, you can perform using a variety of temperaments other than equal temperament.

Scale Tune C-8: -64-+63

What is equal temperament?

This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts, and is the most widely used method of temperament used in western music. The default setting of the SC-880’s Scale Tune function is Equal Temperament.

What is just intonation (tonic C)?

Compared with equal temperament, the principle triads sound pure in this tuning. However, this effect is achieved only in one key, and the triads become ambiguous if you transpose.

What are example settings for equal temperament, just intonation, and Arabian-style scale?

Values are in units of cents:

Note Name Equal Temperament Just Intonation Arabian-Style Scale (Tonic of C)
C 0 0 0
C# 0 -8 +45
D 0 +4 -2
D# 0 +16 -12
E 0 -14 -51
F 0 -2 -8
F# 0 -10 +43
G 0 +2 -4
G# 0 +14 +47
A 0 -16 0
A# 0 +14 -10
B 0 -12 -49

How do I create sounds using tone parameters?

On the SC-880, you can modify the values of a variety of parameters in order to create the sound most suitable for your playing. A parameter is something that affects the sound. The process of modifying parameter values is called editing. Sound parameters affect the volume, timbre and pitch of the sound.

You can set the following parameters:

  • Vibrato: Rate, Depth, Delay
  • Filter: Cutoff Frequency, Resonance
  • Envelope: Attack Time, Decay Time, Release Time

The “Part Tone Modify” and “USER TONE” pages contain the following parameters.

  • Vibrato Rate
  • Vibrato Depth
  • Vibrato Delay
  • Cutoff
  • Reso
  • Attack
  • Decay
  • Release

How do I modulate the sound (vibrato)?

Vibrato is created by modulating the pitch. Applying vibrato makes the sound more expressive.

How do I set the speed of pitch modulation?

This parameter adjusts the speed (frequency) of the pitch modulation. Positive(+) settings make the pitch modulation faster, and negative(-) settings make it slower.

Vibrato Rate: -64-+63

How do I set the depth of pitch modulation?

This parameter adjusts the depth of the pitch modulation. Positive(+) settings make the pitch modulation deeper, and negative(-) settings make it shallower.

Vibrato Depth: -64-+63

How do I set the time until vibrato is applied?

This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin. Positive (+) settings increase the time before vibrato will begin, and negative settings shorten the time.

Vibrato Delay: -64-+63

How do I adjust the tonal character (Filter)?

By modifying the filter settings, you can control the timbre (tone) of the sound. The type of filters in the SC-880 are called Low Pass Filters, and allow only frequencies lower than a specified frequency to pass. This frequency is called the Cutoff Frequency. By modifying the setting of the Cutoff Frequency you can make the sound brighter or darker. The Cutoff Frequency can change over time, controlled by the “envelope”. By adjusting the filter and envelope settings, you can create sounds that have movement and expression.

How do I adjust the brightness?

Positive settings of Cutoff will raise the cutoff frequency. Negative settings will lower the cutoff frequency. As you set this value higher in the positive direction, more overtones will be allowed to pass, and the sound will become harder (brighter). The further this value is set in the negative direction, the fewer overtones will be allowed to pass, and the sound will become softer (darker).

Cutoff: -64-+63 (Cutoff Frequency)

How do I give the sound a distinctive character?

When the Reso value is increased, the overtones in the vicinity of the cutoff frequency will be emphasized, creating a sound with a strong character.

Reso: -64-+63 (Resonance)

How do I modify the changes in volume (Envelope)?

The volume of an instrument changes over time, from the moment the note begins to sound, until the time it disappears. This change can be indicated on a graph as shown in the following diagram. This shape is unique to each instrument, and is an important factor in determining how we distinguish the sounds we hear. This shape is called the “envelope.” The envelopes of musical instrument sounds can change depending on how the instrument is played. For example, if a trumpet is played abruptly and powerfully, the attack will be quick and the sound will be sharp. But if a trumpet is played lightly and softly, the attack will be mellower. In order to adjust the attack of a sound, we can modify the Attack Time of the envelope. By modifying the values of the envelope we can simulate the characteristics of many different instruments. The envelope shape that we create in this way will also affect the way in which the cutoff frequency changes. If the cutoff frequency had been lowered, it will rise as the envelope rises, and will fall as the envelope falls.

How do I adjust the attack time?

This parameter adjusts the sharpness of the beginning of the sound.

Attack: -64-+63 (Attack Time)

How do I adjust the time over which the steady-state volume is reached?

This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will fall from the highest point of the attack down to the sustain level.

Decay: -64-+63 (Decay Time)

How do I adjust the time over which the sound disappears?

This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard. The cutoff frequency will also fall according to this.

Release: -64-+63 (Release Time)

How do I apply real-time changes to the sound?

When a MIDI keyboard, etc., is connected to the SC-880, you can use the modulation lever, pitch bend lever, and aftertouch functions, etc., of the MIDI keyboard to modify the sound in real time.

Tone Edit mode contains pages with the following menu names.

  • Modulation
  • Bender
  • Channel After
  • Poly After
  • CC1
  • CC2

What are the parameter functions?

The values of the “Part Tone Modify” parameters are set for each part. In other words, parameter values belong to parts, and not to sounds (Instruments). For example, if you set Vibrato Rate to +20 and then select a different sound for that part, the Vibrato Rate of +20 will apply to the newly selected sound (not the initial value of ±0). Parameter values that you set in “Part Tone Modify” are stored in the user patch or user performance, and not in the user tone. Parameter values that you set in “USER TONE” are set for the tone itself. The way in which the tone will actually sound is determined by the sum of the “Part Tone Modify” parameter value and the “USER TONE” parameter value. For example, if the “Part Tone Modify” parameter “Vibrato Rate” is set to +20, and the “USER TONE” parameter “Vibrato Rate” is set to -5, the “Vibrato Rate” of the actual sound will be 20-5=+ 15. MIDI messages can be used only to adjust the “Part Tone Modify” parameters; “USER TONE” values cannot be modified using MIDI messages.

How can you use the modulation lever of a MIDI keyboard to modify the sound in real time?

  1. Press [PATCH]-[TONE]-[EDIT] (the indicators light). You will enter Tone Edit mode.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Modulation,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR [ ! ] [ T] [ ◄][► ]to move the cursor to “LFO 1 Pitch.” At the factory settings this is set to 10.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to set the value to 0.
  6. Use CURSOR [ ! ] [ T] [ ◄][► ]to move the cursor to “LFO 1 TVA.”
  7. Rotate the VALUE dial to set the value to 60.
  8. While playing the keyboard, use the modulation lever to modify the sound. Tremolo (cyclic modulation of volume) will be applied to the tone.

What happens when you move the modulation lever or modulation wheel of a MIDI keyboard?

Modulation messages are transmitted, modifying the sound. Parameters in the “Modulation” page specify how the sound will change when this message is received. At the factory settings, the “LFO I Pitch” value is set to 10, so that moving the modulation lever or modulation wheel will apply vibrato to the sound.

What happens when you move the pitch bend lever or pitch wheel of a MIDI keyboard?

Pitch bend messages are transmitted, modifying the sound. Parameters in the “Bender” page specify how the sound will change when this message is received. At the factory settings, the “Range” is set to +2, so that moving the pitch bend lever will change the pitch.

On some MIDI keyboards, what will happen when you press down on the key after a note is played?

Aftertouch messages will be transmitted.

How many types of aftertouch are there?

There are two types of aftertouch: channel pressure and polyphonic key pressure.

In the “Channel After” page, what can you make settings for?

You can make settings for channel pressure.

How can the sound be modified when channel pressure messages are received?

The sound can be modified in various ways. The parameters of the “Channel After” page specify how the sound will change when channel pressure messages are received.

How is the “Channel After” parameter set at the factory settings?

It is set so that these messages will produce no effect.

In the “Poly After” page you can make settings for what?

You can make settings for polyphonic key pressure.

What happens when polyphonic key pressure messages are received?

The sound can be modified in various ways. The parameters of the “Poly After” page specify how the sound will change when polyphonic key pressure messages are received.

How is the “Poly After” parameter set at the factory settings?

It is set so that these messages will produce no effect.

What will happen when the sliders on some MIDI keyboards are moved?

Messages of the specified controller number are transmitted, causing the sound to be modified. The parameters of the “CCI” and “CC2” pages specify how the sound will be affected by the control change messages of the numbers you select. You can set “CCl Number” and “CC2 Number” to specify the control change numbers assigned to “CCl” and “CC2.”

What parameters are contained in the “Modulation,” “Bender,” “Channel After,” “Poly After,” “CCI” and “CC2” pages?

  • Range
  • Cutoff
  • Amplitude
  • LFO 1 Rate
  • LFO 1 Pitch
  • LFO 1 TVF
  • LFO 1 TVA
  • LFO 2 Rate
  • LFO 2 Pitch
  • LFO 2 TVF
  • LFO2TVA

What happens when these settings are at 0?

There will be no effect.

What does the ‘Range’ parameter specify?

Specifies the maximum pitch change that will occur when the corresponding message is received. A setting of 12 allows 1 octave of change, and a setting of 24 allows 2 octaves of change. With a setting of 0, there will be no pitch change.

What does the ‘Cutoff’ parameter specify?

Specifies how the cutoff frequency will change when the corresponding message is received. Higher values will cause the cutoff frequency to rise. Positive(+) settings allow the sound to be made brighter, and negative(-) settings allow the sound to be made more mellow.

What does the ‘Amplitude’ parameter specify?

Specifies the way in which the sound will change when the corresponding message is received. Higher values allow a greater increase in volume.

What do the ‘LFO 1 Rate’ and ‘LFO 2 Rate’ parameters specify?

These parameters specify the way in which the LFO frequency will change when the corresponding message is received, adjusting the speed at which the sound is modulated or varied. Higher values allow the modulation or variation to be speeded up.

What do the ‘LFO 1 Pitch’ and ‘LFO 2 Pitch’ parameters specify?

These parameters specify the way in which the depth of the vibrato effect (cyclic modulation of pitch) will change when the corresponding message is received. Higher values allow the modulation effect to be increased.

What do the ‘LFO 1 TVF’ and ‘LFO 2 TVF’ parameters specify?

These parameters specify the way in which the depth of the growl effect (cyclic modulation of tone) will change when the corresponding message is received. Higher values allow the growl effect to be increased.

What do the ‘LFO 1 TVA’ and ‘LFO 2 TVA’ parameters specify?

These parameters specify the way in which the depth of the tremolo effect (cyclic modulation of volume) will change when the corresponding message is received. Higher values allow the tremolo effect to be increased.

What is a User Tone?

A tone that you edited in the “USER TONE” pages and saved in internal memory. A total of 256 user tones can be saved: tones 1-128 of variation number 64, and tones 1-128 of variation number 65. “USER TONE” parameter values and the tone type will be saved as a User Tone.

How do you create and save a sound (USER TONE)?

  1. Edit the tone.
  2. Press [WRITE] (the indicator lights).
  3. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  4. Select “USER TONE Write,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  5. Use CURSOR [ T ] to move the cursor to the variation number. Select the variation number of the user tone that you wish to save.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the variation number. Select either variation number 64 or 65 as the variation number at which the user tone will be saved.
  7. Use CURSOR [ ► ]to move the cursor to the tone number.
  8. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the tone number. Select the tone number 1-128 in which the tone will be saved.
  9. Press [ENTER). You will be asked to confirm that you wish to save the user tone. If you decide not to save, press [EXIT].
  10. Press [ENTER] to save the user tone.

What will be displayed before the user tune name to determine the tone set of the user tone that was saved?

A symbol. If the user tune was saved in Tone Set, the symbol will not be shown.

What can you do in Rhythm mode?

You can select parts that have been specified as Rhythm parts, select a rhythm set for these parts, and edit rhythm sets. On the SC-880, part A and part B can each use two rhythm sets, meaning that a total of four rhythm sets can be used simultaneously.

What is a “Rhythm Set?”

A collection of various percussive instrument sounds. Unlike a normal part, a Rhythm Part sounds a different instrument for each note number. Since a Rhythm Part needs to simultaneously produce a wide variety of sounds such as bass drum, snare, tom and cymbal, this is very convenient. Each sound within a Rhythm Set is called a Rhythm tone.

What must you do in order to assign a rhythm set to a part?

The part must first be set as a Rhythm Part.

How do you specify the Rhythm Parts?

  1. Press [RHYTHM] (the indicator lights). You will enter Rhythm mode.
  2. Press [INFO] (the indicator lights). The rhythm part setting page will appear.
  3. Use PART [ ◄] [ ►) to select the part whose settings you wish to modify.
  4. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the rhythm part.

How many different rhythm sets does the SC-880 contain?

42

How do you select a Rhythm Set?

  1. Press [RHYTHM] (the indicator lights). In Rhythm mode, the display will show the rhythm module number, tone set number, rhythm set number, and rhythm set name. A rhythm set is selected by specifying the tone set number and the rhythm set number.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ◄] [ ►) to move the cursor to the rhythm set number.
  3. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the rhythm set.

What will appear on the display if no rhythm part has been specified?

“Set one of the parts to be the rhythm part.”

How are the rhythm sets of the SC-880 organized?

Into the following three tone sets:

  • Tone Set 1: The same sounds as the SC-55/55Mk2.
  • Tone Set 2: The same sounds as the SC-88.
  • Tone Set 3: The original tone set of the SC-880.

How many types of rhythm sets does each Tone Set contain?

  • Tone set contains 10 types of rhythm sets
  • tone set contains 14 types
  • tone set contains 25 types

What happens if a rhythm set of the same number does not exist when the tone set is switched?

The closest rhythm set, of the next lowest number will be selected.

What will the rhythm module number be for “Part group A” rhythm parts Rhythm 1 and Rhythm 2?

A-1 or A-2 respectively.

What will the rhythm module number be for “Part group B” rhythm parts Rhythm 1 and Rhythm 2?

B-1 or B-2 respectively.

How can you create your own original rhythm set on the SC-880?

By assigning rhythm tones from any of the 42 rhythm sets to each note. Use the “Tone Set,” “Src Set” and “Src Key” parameters to specify the desired rhythm tone. The SC-880 also lets you modify various parameters for each rhythm tone, to create the perfect sound for your needs.

What parameters can you modify for each instrument (Rhythm tone) of the currently selected Rhythm Set?

  • Volume
  • Pan (stereo position)
  • Pitch
  • Reverb Send Level
  • Chorus Send Level
  • Delay Send Level
  • Assign Group

What mode do you use to create your own original rhythm set?

Rhythm Edit mode. Rhythm Edit mode contains the “Rhythm Name” and “Rhythm Key” pages.

How do you assign a name to the Rhythm Set?

  1. Press [RHVTHM]-[EDIT] (the indicators light).
  2. Use CURSOR [ A ) to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Rhythm Name,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Press CURSOR [ , ] to move the cursor to the rhythm name.
  5. Use CURSOR [ ◄ ) [ ► ] to move the cursor to the character that you wish to change.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired character. The following characters can be selected: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, &#!?.,:;"‘*±l<=>O0W_l$%@¥’-><-
  7. Repeat steps 5-6 to input the name.
  8. When you finish inputting the name, press [WRITE] to save the data as a User Rhythm set. If you do not save the settings as a User rhythm set, the name you input will be lost.

What will be displayed below the menu name in the “Rhythm Key” page?

The name of the note being edited.

How do you edit a Rhythm Tone?

  1. Press [RHYTHM]-[EDIT] (the indicators light). You will enter Rhythm Edit mode.
  2. Use CURSOR [ A ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Rhythm Key.” by rotating the VALUE dial. “Rhythm Key” settings occupy three pages. Here we will select the first page.
  4. Use CURSOR [ f ] to move the cursor to the note name. Select the note number that you wish to edit. A note number in the range of 0-127 can be selected.
  5. Use CURSOR [ A ] [ f ] [ ◄] [ ► ] to move the cursor to the parameter. Use “Tone Set,” “Src Set,” and “Src Key” to select the rhythm tone that will be assigned to the note.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.
  7. Use CURSOR [ A ] [ f ] [ ◄] [► ]to move the cursor to the parameter. Edit the “Level,” “Pan,” “Reverb,” “Chorus,” “Delay,” “Pitch,” and “Assign Group” parameters as desired.
  8. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.
  9. Repeat steps 4-8 to create your own original rhythm set.

What does the ‘Tone Set’ parameter select?

Selects the tone set of the rhythm tone that you wish to edit:

  • Tone Set 1: The same sounds as the SC-55/55Mk2.
  • Tone Set 2: The same sounds as the SC-88.
  • Tone Set 3: The original tone set of the SC-880.

What does the ‘Src Set’ parameter select?

Selects the rhythm set of the rhythm tone that you wish to edit.

What does the ‘Src Key’ parameter select?

Selects the note name of the rhythm tone that you wish to edit.

What does the ‘Level’ parameter specify?

Specifies the volume of the rhythm tone. Higher values result in a louder sound.

What does the ‘Pan’ parameter specify?

Specifies the stereo location at which the rhythm tone will play back. To place the sound in the center, set this value to 0. As the L­ number increases the sound will move further to the left, and as the R-number increases the sound will move further to the right. With a setting of “Rnd” (random), each note will be placed at an unpredictable location.

What does the ‘Reverb’ parameter specify?

Specifies the depth of reverb that will be applied to the rhythm tone. As the value is decreased, the reverb will become shallower. As the value is increased, the reverb will become deeper.

What does the ‘Chorus’ parameter specify?

Specifies the depth of chorus that will be applied to the rhythm tone. As the value is decreased, the chorus will become shallower. As the value is increased, the chorus will become deeper.

What does the ‘Delay’ parameter specify?

Specifies the depth of delay that will be applied to the rhythm tone. As the value is decreased, the delay will become shallower. As the value is increased, the delay will become deeper.

In the case of a Rhythm tone, is it possible to simultaneously use both chorus and delay?

No. When you set the Chorus value, the Delay field will be displayed as -, and only chorus will be applied. When you set the Delay value, the Chorus field will be displayed as-, and only delay will be applied. In other words, either chorus or delay will be applied, whichever was set later.

What does the ‘Pitch’ parameter specify?

Specifies the pitch of the rhythm tone. As the value increases the pitch will rise. As the value decreases the pitch will fall.

What is an Assign Group?

Each instrument can be given a number, and instruments with the identical number are treated as an Assign Group. No two instruments of the same Assign Group will sound together. If while one instrument is sounding, a MIDI mes­ sage is received to play another instrument in the same Assign Group, the first instrument will be turned off first. This is a useful way to prevent two instruments from sounding simultaneously that would not normally do so. For example, since it is obviously impossible for a hi-hat to simultaneously produce both an open hi-hat sound and a closed hi-hat sound, these two sounds could be set to the same Assign Group (the same number) so that they would not sound together. Numbers from Non, 1 to 127 can be selected, but instruments for which Non is selected will not be turned off by other instruments. In other words, instruments with a set­ ting of Non will not be treated as an Assign Group.

How do you save a Rhythm Set?

  1. Edit the rhythm set.
  2. Press [WRITE] (the indicator lights).
  3. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  4. Select “Rhythm Write,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  5. Use CURSOR [ T ] to move the cursor to the user rhythm number.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the user rhythm number at which you wish to save the data. Sixteen user rhythm sets can be saved in U01-Ul6.
  7. Press [EDIT]. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to save the rhythm set. If you decide not to save, press [EXIT].
  8. Press [ENTER] to save the user rhythm.

What can you play in Performance mode?

“Performances”, each of which consists of 32 parts (A01-A16 and 801-816) plus effect settings (system effects, multi-effects).

How many performances does the SC-880 provide?

8

What can you do in Performance mode?

Make settings suitable for a given style of music or frequently-used instrumental ensembles, and save them as one of eight User Performances.

What does each performance consist of?

  • Tones for parts A01-A16, B01-B16 and settings for each part
  • Parameters common to all parts
  • System effect settings
  • Multi-effect settings

How many performances can you select on the SC-880?

Sixteen: preset performances P-1-P-8 and user performances U-1-U-8. Preset performances arc indicated by a “P” before the num­ ber, and user performances by a “U”.

How do you select a Performance?

  1. Press [PERFORM) (the indicator lights).
  2. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the performance.

How many User Performances can you save the performances you create as?

8 (U-1-U-8)

How do you save a Performance?

  1. Carry out the editing in Performance mode.
  2. Press [WRITE] (the indicator lights).
  3. Use CURSOR [ 1 ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  4. Select “Performance Write,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  5. Use CURSOR [ T ] to move the cursor to the user per­ formance number.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the user performance number at which you wish to save the data.
  7. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to save the patch. If you decide not to save, press [EXIT].
  8. Press [ENTER] to Save the User Performance.

How do you create a Performance?

To create a Performance you must assign a tone to each part of the Performance, make settings for each part, and make effect settings. In Performance Edit mode, you can make set­ tings for all parts and for the effects (system effects and multi-effects). To enter Performance Edit mode, press [EDIT] from Performance mode.

What are the steps for setting parameters in Performance Edit mode?

  1. Press [PERFORM] (the indicator lights).
  2. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the performance that you wish to edit.
  3. Press [EDIT] (the indicator lights).
  4. Use CURSOR [ 1 ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the page.
  6. Use CURSOR I i ] [ T l [ ◄ J [ ► J to select the para- meter whose value you wish to change.
  7. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.

What menu names do the pages in Performance Edit mode contain?

  • Performance Name
  • Master Control
  • Reverb
  • Chorus
  • Delay
  • Equalizer
  • Multi-FX

How do you name a Performance?

  1. Edit the performance.
  2. Press [EDIT] (the indicator lights). Enter the performance edit mode.
  3. Use CURSOR [ A ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  4. Select “Performance Name,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  5. Press CURSOR [ T ] to move the cursor to the patch name.
  6. Use CURSOR [ ◄] [ ►] to move the cursor to the character that you wish to change.
  7. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired character. The following characters can be selected: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, &#!?.,:;“’” ±l<=>0□W _1$%@¥’-><-
  8. Repeat steps 6-7 to input the name.
  9. When you finish inputting the name, press [EXIT] to exit Performance Edit mode.
  10. When you finish inputting the name, press [WRITE] to save the data as a User performance. If you do not save the settings as a User performance, the name you input will be lost.

How do you edit the settings for each part and the tone or rhythm set that is assigned to each part in Tone Edit mode?

Use PART [ ◄] [► ]to select the part that you wish to set. The current part will be shown in the PART field of the dis­ play.

What are the steps for setting the parameters of each part?

  1. Press [PERFORM]-[TONE]-[EDIT] (the indicators light). Enter the performance mode.
  2. Use PART [ ◄] [ ►] to select the part for which you wish to make settings.
  3. Use CURSOR [ A ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  4. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the pages for which you wish to make settings.
  5. Use CURSOR [ A ] [ T ] [ ◄] [ ►] to select the para-meter that you wish to modify.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.

What pages does Tone Edit mode contain?

  • Output
  • Effect Send
  • Rx MIDI
  • Mode
  • Keyboard Range
  • Pitch
  • Scale Tune
  • Part Tone Modify
  • USER TONE
  • Modulation
  • Bender
  • Channel After
  • Poly After
  • CC1
  • CC2

How many types of effects does the SC-880 have?

Two: System effects and Multi-effects.

What can you use as system effects?

  • Eight types of reverb to reverberate the sound
  • Eight types of chorus to make the sound richer and more spacious
  • Ten types of delay to create echo effects
  • A two­ band equalizer to modify the tonal character of the sound

What can you use as multi-effects?

One of 64 different effects to distort or modulate the sound, or combine multiple effects together.

How do system effects and multi-effects differ?

Not only by their effect type, but also in the processing path within the SC-880.

What do the system effects reverb/chorus/delay process?

A portion of the sound of each part to create a new effect sound (reverberation, etc.), which is then added to the original sound.

How is the amount of sound that is sent to the effect from each part adjusted?

By the Send Level. As this value is increased, more sound will be sent to the effect, which will cause the effect to be applied more deeply.

What can you specify for the Equalizer system effect?

Whether or not the sound of each part will be passed through the effect; i.e., to switch the equaliz.er on/off for each part.

How can multi-effects be applied to a part?

To modify the sow1d itself, transforming it into a sound with a very different tonal character.

How many different power effects does the SC-880 provide?

64

What does the effect structure let you make settings for?

One multi-effect, and tum it on/off for each part.

How many types of multi-effect can be used at a time?

Only one type. All parts for which the multi-effect is turned on will be processed by the same multi-effect.

What will the effects that are available for the system effect and the multi-effect depend on?

The System Mode setting.

What can you use in Single Module Mode (Single)?

  • One effect for Reverb
  • One effect for Chorus
  • One effect for Delay
  • One effect for Equalizer

What can you use in Double Module Mode (Double)?

  • Two effects for Reverb
  • Two effects for Chorus
  • Note: Equalizer and delay cannot be used. Also, multi-effects can be used only for Part Group A.

What does System mode provide a parameter for?

Lets you switch the effects (system effect, multi-effect) on/off. If this parameter is switched off, no effects will be applied to the tones at all, which can be convenient when you are editing or auditioning tones.

How can you apply the Multi-effects to the Part in Group B?

You can apply the Multi-effects to the Part in Group B if the Receive Channel is set to A01 – A 16.

What is Single Module mode and Double Module mode?

Single Module mode is the normal mode in which you can use 32 Parts, and Double Module mode is the mode in which you can use the SC-880 as two sound modules (Part Groups A and B).

How do you apply reverberation to the sound (Reverb)?

Reverb is an effect that adds reverberation to a sound, much like what you would hear in a concert hall. Reverb settings can be made in Patch Edit mode or in Performance Edit mode. The amount of reverb that is applied to the sound of each part is determined by the Reverb Level and by the Reverb Send Level that is set in Tone Edit mode. Send Level specifies the amount of sound that is sent from each part to the reverb.

How do you access the reverb settings?

  1. Press (PATCH]-[EDIT] (the indicators light). Enter Patch Edit mode.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Reverb,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR [ ! I [ f ] [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to select the parameter that you wish to modify.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to modify the parameter value.
  6. Press and hold the VOLUME knob to hear the result of the parameters that you modified.
  7. Repeat steps 4-6 to set the parameters.

How do you quit making settings?

If you wish to quit making settings, press [EXIT].

What are the different types of reverb?

  • Type (Reverb Type) You can choose from 8 types of reverb.
    • Room 1 Room2 Room3 These reverbs simulate the reverberation of a room. They provide a well-defined spacious reverberation.
    • Hall 1 Hall 2 These reverbs simulate the reverberation of a concert hall. They provide a deeper reverberation than the Room reverbs.
    • Plate This simulates a plate reverb (a studio device using a metal plate).
    • Delay This is a conventional delay that produces echo effects.
    • Panning Delay This is a special delay in which the delayed sounds move left and right. It is effective when you are listening in stereo.

What happens when you change the Reverb Type?

When you change the Reverb Type, the following parameter values will automatically change. This is so that the parameter values will have the settings most appropriate for the selected Reverb Type. You can select these parameters and modify the values to adjust the effect to your taste.

What do the different Reverb parameters do?

  • Level: 0-127 (Reverb Level) Sets the amount of the reverberant sound. Higher values result in louder reverberation.
  • If the send level (Reverb Send Level) value is 0, no reverb will be applied to that part.
  • Character: 0-7 (Reverb Character) This parameter selects only the type of reverb. 0-5 are reverb effects; and 6 and 7 are delay effects.
  • Pre-LPF: 0-7 (Reverb Pre-LPF) A low pass filter can be applied to the sound coming into the reverb to cut the high frequency range. Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies, resulting in a more mellow reverberation.
  • Time: 0-127 (Reverb Time) Sets the time over which the reverberation will continue. Higher values result in longer reverberation.
  • Delay Feedback: 0-127 (Reverb Delay Feedback) This parameter is used when the Reverb Character is set to 6 or 7, Reverb Type is set to Delay or Panning Delay. It sets the way in which delays repeat. Higher values result in more delay repeats.
  • Pre Delay Time: 0-127 msec (Reverb Pre-Delay Time) Sets the delay time until the reverberant sound is heard. Higher values result in a longer pre-delay time, simulating a larger reverberant space.
  • Reverb Pre-Delay Time cannot be used when Double Module Mode is selected.

What is the easiest way to adjust the reverb settings?

When you change the Reverb Type, the above-listed six reverb parameters (including Reverb Character) will be automatically adjusted to the optimal values. Rather than individually adjusting each reverb parameter, it is easier to first set the Reverb Type (listed in the MIDI implementation as [REVERB MACRO]), and then modify only those parameters that you wish to modify. In particular when using MIDI exclusive messages, this method of making settings will minimize the amount of data.

What are the different Reverb Type values and their corresponding parameter values?

Type Room 1 Room 2 Room 3 Hall 1 Hall2 Plate Delax PanDelaX
Level 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
Character 0 4 6 7
Pre-LPF 3 4 0 0 0 0 0
Time 80 56 64 72 64 88 32 64
Delay Feedback 0 0 0 0 40 32
Pre Delay Time 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

How do you add breadth to the sound (Chorus)?

Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound, adding depth and richness. Chorus settings can be made in Patch Edit mode or in Performance Edit mode. The amount of chorus that is applied to the sound of each part is determined by the Chorus Level and by the Chorus Send Level that is set in Tone Edit mode. Send Level specifies the amount of sound that is sent from each part to the chorus.

How do you access the chorus settings?

  1. Press [PATCH]-[EDIT] (the indicators light). Enter Patch Edit mode.
  2. Use CURSOR [ A ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Chorus,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR [ A ] [ f ] [ ◄] [ ►] to select the parameter that you wish to modify.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to modify the parameter value.
  6. Press and hold the VOLUME knob to hear the result of the parameters that you modified.
  7. Repeat steps 4-6 to set the parameters.

How do you quit making settings?

To quit making settings, press [EXIT].

What are the different types of chorus?

  • Type {Chorus Type) You can choose from 8 types of chorus.
    • Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Chorus 3 Chorus 4 These are conventional chorus effects that add spaciousness and depth to the sound.
    • Feedback Chorus This is a chorus with a flanger-like effect and a soft sound.
    • Flanger This is an effect sounding somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing.
    • Short Delay This is a delay with a short delay time.
    • Short Delay Fb This is a short delay with many repeats.

What happens when you change the Chorus Type?

When you change the Chorus Type, the following parameter values will automatically change. This is so that the parameter values will have the settings most appropriate for the selected Chorus Type. You can select these parameters and modify the values to adjust the effect to your taste.

What do the different Chorus parameters do?

  • Level: 0-127 {Chorus Level) Sets the amount of the chorus sound. Higher values will cause the chorus sound to be louder.
  • If the send level (Chorus Send Level) value is 0, no chorus will be applied to that part.
  • Feedback: 0-127 {Chorus Feedback) Sets the level at which the chorus sound is returned (fed back) into the chorus. By using feedback, a denser chorus sound can be created. Higher values result in a greater feedback level.
  • Pre-LPF: 0-7 (Chorus Pre-LPF) A low pass filter can be applied to the sound coming into the chorus to cut the high frequency range. Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies, resulting in a more mellow chorus sound.
  • Delay: 0-127 {Chorus Delay) Sets the delay time of the chorus effect. Higher values will cause greater deviation in pitch of the chorus sound.
  • Rate: 0-127 (Chorus Rate) Sets the speed (frequency) at which the chorus sound is modulated. Higher values result in faster modulation.
  • Depth: 0-127 {Chorus Depth) Sets the depth at which the chorus sound is modulated. Higher values result in deeper modulation.
  • Send to Reverb: 0-127 (Chorus Send Level To Reverb) Sets the amount of chorus sound that will be sent to the reverb. Higher values result in more sound being sent.
  • Send to Delay: 0-127 (Chorus Send Level To Delay) Sets the amount of chorus sound that will be sent to the delay. Higher values result in more sound being sent.
  • Chorus Send Level To Delay cannot be used when Double Module Mode is selected.

What is the easiest way to adjust the chorus settings?

When you change the Chorus Type, the above-listed eight Chorus parameters (including Chorus Character) will be automatically adjusted to the optimal values. Rather than individually adjusting each Chorus parameter, it is easier to first set the Chorus Type (listed in the MIDI implementation as [CHORUS MACRO]), and then modify only those parameters that you wish to modify. In particular, when using MIDI exclusive messages, this method of making settings will minimize the amount of data.

What are the different Chorus Type values and their corresponding parameter values?

Ty~ Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Chorus 3 Chorus 4 FbChorus Ranger SDelay SDelayFb
Level 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
Feedback 0 5 16 64 112 80
Pre-LPF 0 0 0
Delay 112 80 80 64 127 127 127 127
Rate 1 0 0
Deplh 19 19 16 24 5 127 127
Send 10 Reverb 0 0 0
Send lo Delay 0 0

How do you add echo to the sound (Delay)?

Delay creates echoes. It is also possible to give depth and breadth to a sound by adding a short delay to the original sound. Delay settings can be made in Patch Edit mode or in Performance Edit mode. The amount of delay that is applied to the sound of each part is determined by the Delay Level and by the Delay Send Level that is set in Tone Edit mode. Send Level specifies the amount of sound that is sent from each part to the delay.

How do you access the delay settings?

  1. Press [PATCH]·[EDIT] (the indicators light). Enter Patch Edit mode.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Delay,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR [ i I [ f ] [ ◄] [ ►] to select the parameter that you wish to modify.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to modify the parameter value.
  6. Press and hold the VOLUME knob to hear the result of the parameters that you modified.
  7. Repeat steps 4-6 to set the parameters.

What if you change your mind and decide you do not want to modify the settings?

Press [EXIT] at any time if you change your mind, and decide you do not want to modify the setting.

Can you use Delay in Double Module mode?

In Double Module mode, delay cannot be used.

What are the different types of Delay?

  • Type {Delay Type) You can choose from 10 types of delay.
    • Delay 1 Delay 2 Delay 3 These are conventional delays. Delay 1, Delay 2 and Delay 3 have progressively longer delay times.
    • Delay 4 This is a delay with a rather short delay time.
    • Panning Delay 1 Panning Delay 2 Panning Delay 3 The delay sound moves between left and right. This is effective when listening in stereo. Pan Delay 1, Pan Delay 2 and Pan Delay 3 have progressively longer delay times.
    • Panning Delay 4 This is a rather short delay with the delayed sound moving between left and right. It is effective when listening in stereo.
    • Delay to Reverb Reverb is added to the delay sound which moves between left and right. It is effective when listening in stereo.
    • Panning Repeat The delay sound moves between left and right, but the localization is different than the effects listed above. It is effective when listening in stereo.

What happens when you change the Delay Type?

When you change the Delay Type, the following parameter values will automatically change. This is so the parameter values will have the settings most appropriate for the selected Delay Type. You can select these parameters and modify the values to adjust the effect to your taste.

What do the different Delay parameters do?

  • Level: 0-127 (Delay Level) Sets the overall volume of the three delays (center, left, and right). Higher values result in a louder overall delay.
  • If the send level (Delay Send Level) value is 0, no delay will be applied to that part.
  • FeedBack: -64-0-+63 (Delay Feedback) This parameter affects the number of times the delay will repeat. With a value of 0, the delay will not repeat. With higher values there will be more repeats. With negative (-) values, the center delay will be fed back with inverted phase. Negative values are effective with short delay times.
  • Pre-LPF: 0-7 (Delay Pre-LPF) A low pass filter can be applied to the sound coming into the delay to cut the high frequency range. Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies, resulting in a more mellow delay sound.
  • ToReverb: 0-127 (Delay Send Level To Reverb) Sets the amount of delay sound that is sent to the reverb. Higher values result in more sound being sent.
  • Time Center: 0. 1 msec-1 sec (Delay Time Center) The delay effect of the SC-880 allows you to set three delay times; center, left and right (when listening in stereo). Delay Time Center sets the delay time of the delay located at the center.
  • Time Ratio Left: 4%-500% (Delay Time Ratio Left) Sets the delay time of the delay located at the left as a percentage of the Delay Time Center. (up to a max. of 1.0 sec)
  • Time Ratio Right: 4%-500% (Delay Time Ratio Right) Sets the delay time of the delay located at the right as a percentage of the Delay Time Center. (up to a max. of 1.0 sec)
  • Level Center: 0-127 (Delay Level Center) Sets the volume of the central delay. Higher values result in a louder center delay.
  • Level Left: 0-127 (Delay Level Left) Sets the volume of the left delay. Higher values result in a louder left delay.
  • Level Right: 0-127 (Delay Level Right) Sets the volume of the right delay. Higher values result in a louder right delay.

What is the easiest way to adjust the delay settings?

When you change the Delay Type, the above-listed ten Delay parameters (including Delay Character) will be automatically adjusted to the optimal values. Rather than individually adjusting each Delay parameter, it is easier to first set the Delay Type (listed in the MIDI implementation as [DELAY MACRO]), and then modify only those parameters that you wish to modify. In particular, when using MIDI exclusive messages, this method of making settings will minimize the amount of data.

What are the different Delay Type values and their corresponding parameter values?

T~ee Delay 1 Delay 2 Delay 3 Delay 4 Panning Delay 1 Panning Delay 4 To Reverb Panning Re!!!at
Level 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
Feedback +16 +16 +8 +8 +10 +7 +9 .3
Pre-LPF 0 0 0 0 0 0 ·24
ToReverb 0 0 0 0 36
Time Center 340m 550 m 1 sec 130m 500m 260m 700m 750m
Time Ratio Lett 4% 4% 4% 4% 50% 50% 50% 88%
Time Ratio Right 4% 4% 4% 4% 100% 100% 50% 133%
Level Center 127 127 127 127 0 97
Level Lett 0 0 0 125 125 114 127
Level R~ht 0 0 60 60 64 60 60 67

How do you set the Send Level (Reverb/Chorus/Delay)?

On the SC-880, you can adjust the Send Levels to specify the amount of system effect (Reverb, Chorus, Delay) that will be applied to the sound of each part. Send Levels can be set independently for each part, and the amount of system effect that actually results is determined by the Send Level value and the levels of each system effect.

How do you set the Send Level?

  1. Press [PATCH]-[TONE]-[EDIT] (the indicators light). Enter Tone Edit mode.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Use PART [ ◄] [► ]to select the part whose settings you wish to modify. The settings of the selected part will be shown in the upper left of the display.
  4. Select “Effect Send,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  5. Use CURSOR I ! ] I ’ ] I ◄] I ► l to select the parameter that you wish to modify.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.
  7. Repeat steps 3-6 to make settings for all parts.

What parameters can be set in the “Effect Send” page?

  • Multl-FX: Specifies whether the sound of the part will be sent to the multi-effect (On) or not (Off). If this is turned On, the “Revcrb,” “Chorus,” “Delay” and “EQ” settings of “Effect Send” will be ignored. If you wish to apply a system effect to a part for which Multi-FX is On, refer to .
  • Reverb (Reverb Send Level): The portion of the sound of the part sent to the reverb. Increasing this value will increase the amount sent to reverb, and the reverb will be applied more deeply. Decreasing this value will decrease the amount sent to the reverb, and the reverb will be applied less deeply.
  • Chorus (Chorus Send Level): The portion of the sound of the part sent to the chorus. Increasing this value will increase the amount sent to chorus, and the chorus will be applied more deeply. Decreasing this value will decrease the amount sent to the chorus, and the chorus will be applied less deeply.
  • Delay (Delay Send Level): The portion of the sound of the part sent to the delay. Increasing this value will increase the amount sent to delay, and the delay will be applied more deeply. Decreasing this value will decrease the amount sent to the delay, and the delay will be applied less deeply.
  • EQ: Specifics whether the sound of the part will be sent through the equalizer (On) or not (Off). If this is turned On, the sound of the part will be sent through the equalizer. If this is turned Off, the equalizer will not apply.

How do you modify the tonal character (Equalizer)?

The SC-880 has a two-band equalizer (high range, low range). An equalizer lets you boost or cut specified frequency ranges of a sound to adjust the tone. For each range, high and low, you can specify the frequency and the amount of boost or cut (gain). For each part you can specify whether or not the equalizer will be applied.

How do you make settings for the equalizer?

  1. Press [PATCH)-[EDIT] (the indicators light). Enter Patch Edit mode.
  2. Use CURSOR [ i ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Equalizer,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR [ A ] [ ’ ] [ ◄] [ ► ] to select the parameter that you wish to modify.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to modify the parameter value.
  7. Repeat steps 4-6 to set the parameters.

How do you quit making settings?

To quit making settings, press [EXIT].

What do the equalizer parameters do?

  • Low Fq (Equalizer Low Frequency} 200/400 (Hz:}
  • High Fq (Equalizer High Frequency) 3/6 k (Hz:) These parameters set the cutoff frequencies of the ranges boosted or cut by the equalizer.
  • LowGain (Equalizer Low Gain) -12-0-+ 12 (dB)
  • HiGain (Equalizer High Gain) -12-0-+12 (dB) Specifies the amount of boost or cut (gain) for the high frequency range (high) and the low frequency range (low). Positive(+) settings will boost, and negative(-) settings will cut.
  • With a Gain setting of 0, the equalizer will have no effect.

How do you turn the Equalizer On/Off for each part?

On the SC-880 you can switch the equalizer on/off for each part.

How do you turn the equalizer on/off for each part?

  1. Press [PATCH]-[TONE)-[EDIT] (the indicators light). Tone Patch Edit mode.
  2. Use CURSOR [ A ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Effect Send,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use PART [ ◄ ) [ ► ) to select the part whose settings you wish to modify. The settings of the selected part will be shown in the upper left of the display.
  5. Use CURSOR [ A ) [ , ] [ ◄ ) [ ► ] to move the cursor to"EQ."
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to turn the setting on/off. Rotate the VALUE dial toward the right to turn the setting on, or toward the left to turn the setting off.
  7. Repeat steps 4-6 to turn the equalizer on/off for each part.

How do you quit making settings?

To quit making settings, press [EXIT/.

What are Multi-Effects?

Separately from the system effects, the SC-880 provides “multi-effects,” which are specially designed to be applied to specific parts. 64 different multi-effects are provided, including individual effects which distort the waveform, modulate the sound, or add reverberation to the sound, as well as multiple effects that are connected in series or parallel. Since appropriate parameters are provided for each effect, you can make fine adjustments to the sound for professional-level control. You can also save 64 different effects settings of your own as User multi- effects.

What are some details about System effects and Multi-effects and on the effect structure of the SC-880?

For details on System effects and Multi-effects, and on the effect structure of the SC-880, refer to.

What data do the user performances contain when the SC-880 is shipped?

When the SC-880 is shipped, the user performances contain the same data as the preset performances.

Can Multi-effects be applied independently to individual parts?

Yes.

What mode will the procedural explanations be given in?

The procedural explanations will be given in Patch mode. If you are making these settings from Performance mode, read [PATCH] as [PERFORM].

How do you select a multi-effect?

On the SC-880 you can select from 64 preset multi-effects (P-01-P-64), and 64 user multi-effects (U-01-U-64). Preset multi-effects are indicated by a “P” before the number, and user multi-effects by a “U,” as follows.

How do you select a Multi-Effects?

  1. Press [M-FX] (the indicator lights).
  2. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the multi-effect that you wish to apply.

Does simply selecting a multi-effect cause it to be applied to a tone or patch?

No. Simply selecting a multi-effect will not cause it to be applied to a tone or patch. Multi-effects can be turned on/ off for each part.

How do you turn on/off the setting for each part?

  1. Press [INFO) (the indicator lights). The display will show the multi-effect on/ off setting for each of the 32 parts.
  2. Use CURSOR [ i ] [ f ] [ ◄][► ]to select the part that you wish to modify.
  3. Rotate the VALUE dial to turn the setting on/off. Rotate the VALUE dial toward the right to turn the setting on, or toward the left to turn the setting off.
  4. When you finish making settings, press [EXIT) to leave the setting page.

How do you save a Multi-Effects?

After you have modified the parameters of a multi-effect to your taste, you can save it as a user multi-effects. 64 user multi-effects can be saved.

How do you save a Multi-Effects?

  1. Set the parameters of the multi-effects.
  2. Press [WRITE] (the indicator lights).
  3. Use CURSOR [ A ) to move the cursor to the menu name.
  4. Select “Multi-FX Write,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  5. Use CURSOR [ f ] to move the cursor to the user multi­ effects number.
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the user multi-effects number at which you wish to save the data. User multi-effects can be saved in the 64 multi-effects U-01-U-64.
  7. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to save the patch. If you decide not to save, press [EXIT].
  8. Press [ENTER] to save the user multi-effects.

What are the different types of multi-effects settings?

There are two types of multi-effects settings: settings that are made in Patch Edit mode and Performance Edit mode, and settings that are made in Multi-effect mode.

How do you adjust the send level in patch (performance) edit mode?

In Patch (Performance) Edit mode, you can adjust the send levels to specify how much of the sound of parts to which the multi-effect was applied will be sent to the system effects (reverb, chorus, delay). For the equalizer, you can specify that it be applied (on) or not (off). The send level is common to all parts for which the multi-effect is turned on, and the amount of the system effect that will actually result will be determined by the send level value and by the level of each system effect.

How do you adjust the send level?

  1. Press [PATCH]-[EDIT] (the indicators light).
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Multi-FX,” by rotating the VALUE dial. “Multi-PX” consists of two pages.
  4. Use CURSOR [ ! ] [ f ] [ ◄] [ ►] to select the parameter that you wish to modify.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.

What are the different Send to parameters and what do they do?

  • ♦ Reverb: 0-127 (Send to Reverb) Part of the sound of parts for which multi-effects is switched ON will be sent to the reverb. Increasing this value will increase the amount that is sent to the reverb, causing the reverb to be applied more deeply. Decreasing the value will decrease the amount that is sent to the reverb, causing the reverb to be applied less deeply.
  • ♦ Chorus: 0-127 (Send to Chorus) Part of the sound of parts for which multi-effects is switched ON will be sent to the chorus. Increasing this value will increase the amount that is sent to the chorus, causing the chorus to be applied more deeply. Decreasing the value will decrease the amount that is sent to the chorus, causing the chorus to be applied less deeply.
  • ♦ Delay: 0-127 (Send to Delay) Part of the sound of parts for which multi-effects is switched ON will be sent to the delay. Increasing this value will increase the amount that is sent to the delay, causing the delay to be applied more deeply. Decreasing the value will decrease the amount that is sent to the delay, causing the delay to be applied less deeply.
  • ♦ EQ: On/Off (Send to Equalizer) Specify whether the sound of parts for which multi-effect is switched ON will be sent through the equalizer (On) or not (Off). If this is On, the sound of the part will be sent through the equalizer. If this is Off, the equalizer will not apply.

What happens to the Reverb/Chorus/Delay for parts to which Multi-Effects are applied?

When the multi-effect is turned on, the Send Level that was set in Tone Edit mode for that part will be ignored, and the value will be displayed as-in the screen.

How do you apply system effects (reverb, chorus, delay, EQ) to parts for which multi-effect is On?

If you wish to apply system effects (reverb, chorus, delay, EQ) to parts for which multi-effect is On, make settings for the above “Reverb,” “Chorus,” “Delay,” and “EQ” parameters.

How do you make settings in Multi-Effect mode?

In Multi-effect mode you can set the parameters of the multi­effects.

How do you make settings in Multi-Effect mode?

  1. Press [M-FX] (the indicator lights).
  2. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the multi-effect that you wish to use.
  3. Press [EDIT] (the indicator lights). The display will show the effect algorithms, and the currently selected algorithm will be enclosed in a box. Below it will be displayed the parameters related to the selected algorithm.

How do I apply special effects to the sound (Multi-Effects)?

The number of the currently selected multi-effect is shown in the upper left.

  1. Press the [MULTI-FX] button.
  2. Use CURSOR [▲] to move the cursor to the algorithm area.
  3. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired algorithm.
  4. Use CURSOR [▲] [▼] [◄] [►] to move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to modify.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.
  6. Press and hold the VOLUME knob to hear how the effect changes. You will hear the tone of the part that was selected in the PART display before you entered edit mode.
  7. Repeat steps 4–8 to make the desired settings.
  8. Press [EXIT] to exit the editing page.

An effect whose parameter settings have been modified will be indicated by an asterisk (*) before the effect name. Be aware that when you change the Effect Type, the effect parameters will be initialized. To save your parameter values, it is convenient to use a User Multi-Effects.

How do I switch pages?

Move the cursor to the algorithm area and use CURSOR [◄] [►] or the VALUE dial. Alternatively, if the cursor is located at a parameter, you can also use CURSOR [◄] [►] to switch pages.

What happens if a monaural multi-effect is turned on?

The settings for Part Pan and Master Pan will be ignored. Monaural multi-effects are those such as P-02: Spectrum and P-35: OD-+ Chorus. In the case of stereo multi-effects, however, the settings for Part Pan and Master Pan will be effective when the multi-effect is on. Stereo multi-effects are those that maintain discrete L/R channels all the way to the output stage such as P-01: Stereo-EQ and P-16: Hexa Chorus.

What happens if the Multi-effect is turned on for two or more parts?

The sound of each part will be mixed. It will not be possible to set reverb/chorus/delay/equalizer independently for these parts.

What happens when P-00 Thru is selected?

The multi-effects will not be applied.

Can controllers be used to modify the values of multi-effects parameters?

Yes, controllers can be used to modify the values of multi-effects parameters. Using MIDI messages to modify effect parameters during a song would require a large amount of data if you were to use only Exclusive messages. Thus, the SC-880 allows you to use controllers to set the main effect parameters. Since you can use Control Change messages to modify parameter values, the amount of data will not be excessively large, even if you modify parameter values during a song. Also, if you are using a keyboard or other instrument to play, you can use controllers to modify the values in real time.

How do I control the multi-effect from a MIDI keyboard?

As an example, we will explain how to use “Src1” “Depth 1” to control the multi-effect from a MIDI keyboard.

  1. Press [PATCH] [EDIT] (the indicators light).
  2. Use CURSOR [▲] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Multi-FX,” by rotating the VALUE dial. “Multi-FX” consists of two pages. Here we will select the following page.
  4. Use CURSOR [▲] [▼] [◄] [►] to move the cursor to “Src1.”
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value. For this example, select “CC16.”
  6. Use CURSOR [▲] [▼] [◄] [►] to move the cursor to “Depth1 .”
  7. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value. For this example, select “+100.”
  8. Set the controller of the MIDI keyboard to transmit “CC16.” For details, refer to the owner’s manual of your MIDI keyboard.

Now the controller of the MIDI keyboard will be able to control the multi-effect. “Src1” (Control Source 1) can be used to control the multi-effect parameters that are marked with a “+”.

What do Src1 and Src2 specify?

  • Src1: Off/CC1-95/CAf/Bend (Control Source 1)
  • Src2: Off/CC1-95/CAf/Bend (Control Source 2)

These specify the controllers that you wish to use. “Src1” will control the parameter marked with a “+” at the left of the parameter name. “Src2” will control the parameter marked with a “#” at the left of the parameter name.

  • CC 1-95: Controller numbers 1-95
  • CAf: Channel aftertouch
  • Bend: Pitch bend

For CC 1-95, make sure that the setting matches the controller number of the device that is transmitting the MIDI messages.

What do Depth1 and Depth 2 specify?

  • Depth 1: -100-+100 (%) (Control Depth 1)
  • Depth2: -100-+ 100 (%) (Control Depth 2)

These specify the percentage of the full parameter range in which change will actually occur when a controller is used. Higher values will allow a greater range of change. If this value is set to 0, the controller will not affect the effect parameter. With negative(-) settings, the change will be inverted. The controller will increase/decrease the value of the effect parameter relative to the value that was set from the panel. At this time, the value displayed on the Display will not change.

When Depth has a positive(+) setting:

Display setting value + value from controller × depth(%) / 100

When Depth has a negative(-) setting:

Display setting value – value from controller × depth (%) / 100

What is an example of Depth?

The Drive parameter of P-05: Overdrive normally changes in the range of 0–127. When this parameter is modified by a controller, it will change in the range of 0–127 if the Control Depth value is +100. With a value of +50, it will change in the range of 0–64 (i.e., 50% of 127).

Normally -, 0–127

Depth= +100% -, 0–127 Depth = +50% -+ 0–64 Depth= -100% -, 127–0

What are the types of Multi-Effects?

Effect types can be broadly grouped into the following categories:

  • Individual Effects
    • Effects that modify the tone color (filter type) (P-01–P-04)
    • Effects that distort the sound (distortion type) (P-05–P-06)
    • Effects that modulate the sound (modulation type) (P-07–P-13)
    • Effects that affect the level (compressor type) (P-14–P-15)
    • Effects that broaden the sound (chorus type) (P-16–P-20)
    • Effects that add reverberation to the sound (delay/reverb type) (P-21–P-28)
    • Effects that modify the pitch (pitch shift type) (P-29–P-30)
    • Others (P-31–P-34)
  • Series Effects
    • Effects that connect two types of effect in series (series 2) (P-35–P-46)
    • Effects that connect three or more types of effect in series (series 3/series 4/series 5) (P-47–P-55)
  • Parallel Effects
    • Effects that connect two types of effect in parallel (parallel 2) (P-56–P-64)

How do I use the hexadecimal values when making settings via exclusive messages?

In the explanations that follow, the hexadecimal values used when making settings via exclusive messages are given at the end of the effect type line. The parameter number is given in decimal form at the end of the Effect Parameter line. Use these values when you use MIDI messages to set parameters. For details on using exclusive messages, refer to p. 90, 91, 181. The algorithm connection is shown below the effect name. The various parameters explained below are grouped by their algorithm.

What is an example of setting the effect type to P-01: Stereo-EQ?

F0 41 10 42 12 40 03 00 01 00 3C F7
address value

This means that the value for Address 40H 03H 00H is MSB: 01H, LSB: 00H. For example, if you wish to set the effect type to P-01: Stereo-EQ, use an exclusive message such as the following:

How do the parameter numbers and Exclusive message addresses correspond?

Parameter numbers and Exclusive message addresses correspond as follows.
40 03 03 40 03 0D
04 0E
05 0F
06 10
07 11
08 12
09 13
0A 14
0B 15
0C 16

Parameters with “+” or “#” symbols allow you to modify their value using specified controller, such as pitch bend lever and sliders, or with control change messages.

When using 3D Effects, how do I place my speakers?

The following four 3D effects utilize RSS (Roland Sound Space) technology to create a spaciousness that cannot be produced by delay, reverb, or chorus, etc.

  • P-20: 3D Chorus
  • P-28: 3D Delay
  • P-31: 3D Auto
  • P-32: 3D Manual

When using these effects, we recommend that you place your speakers as follows. Also, make sure that the speakers are at a sufficient distance from the walls on either side. If the left and right speakers are too far apart, or if there is too much reverberation, the full 3D effect may not appear. Each of these effects has an “Output Mode” parameter. If the sound from the OUTPUT jacks will be heard through speakers, set this parameter to Speaker. If the sound will be heard through headphones, set it to Phones. This will ensure that the optimal 3D effect will be heard. If this parameter is not set correctly, the full 3D effect may not appear.

What is P-00: Thru?

[00H, 00H] No Effect will be applied. When a General MIDI System On or GS Reset messages is received, P-00: Thru will be selected for multi-effects. When “P-00 Thru” is selected, pressing [EDIT] will access the following display. If you wish to edit the multi-effects, you must first select the multi-effects type.

What is P-01: Stereo-EQ?

[01H, 00H] This is a four-band stereo equalizer (low, mid × 2, high).

What does the [LOW] Low Frequency parameter do?

200Hz/400Hz Selects the frequency of the low range (200 Hz/400 Hz).

What does the [LOW] Low Gain parameter do?

-12–+12 (dB) Adjusts the gain of the low frequency.

What does the [MID1] Mid1 Freq parameter do?

(Mid 1 Frequency) 200Hz–6.3kHz Adjusts the frequency of Mid 1 (mid range 1).

What does the [MID1] Mid1 Q parameter do?

0.5/1.0/2.0/4.0/9.0 This parameter adjusts the width of the area around the Mid 1 Freq parameter that will be affected by the Gain setting. Higher values of Q will result in a narrower area being affected.

What does the [MID1] Mid1 Gain parameter do?

-12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain for the area specified by the Mid 1 Freq parameter and Mid 1 Q parameter settings.

What does the [MID2] Mid2 Freq parameter do?

(Mid 2 Frequency) 200Hz–6.3kHz Adjusts the frequency of Mid 2 (mid range 2).

What does the [MID2] Mid2 Q parameter do?

0.5/1.0/2.0/4.0/9.0 This parameter adjusts the width of the area around the Mid 2 Freq parameter that will be affected by the Gain setting. Higher values of Q will result in a narrower area being affected.

What does the [MID2] Mid2 Gain parameter do?

-12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain for the area specified by the Mid 2 Freq parameter and Mid 2 Q parameter settings.

What does the [HI] High Frequency parameter do?

4k/8kHz Selects the frequency of the high range (4 kHz/8 kHz).

What does the [HI] High Gain parameter do?

-12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the high frequency.

What does the (OUT) +Output Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the output level.

What is P-02: Spectrum?

[01H, 01H] Spectrum is a type of filter that modifies the timbre by boosting or cutting the level at specific frequencies. It is similar to an equalizer, but has 8 frequency points fixed at locations most suitable for adding character to the sound.

What does the [W] Band Width parameter do?

0.5/1.0/2.0/4.0/9.0 Adjusts the width of the frequency bands whose gain is being modified (common to all bands). Higher settings will make the frequency band narrower.

What does the Band 1 parameter do?

(Band 1 Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the 250 Hz level.

What does the Band 2 parameter do?

(Band 2 Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the 500 Hz level.

What does the Band 3 parameter do?

(Band 3 Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the 1000 Hz (1 kHz) level.

What does the Band 4 parameter do?

(Band 4 Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the 1250 Hz level.

What does the Band 5 parameter do?

(Band 5 Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the 2000 Hz level.

What does the Band 6 parameter do?

(Band 6 Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the 3150 Hz level.

What does the Band 7 parameter do?

(Band 7 Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the 4000 Hz level.

What does the Band 8 parameter do?

(Band 8 Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the 8000 Hz level.

What does the (OUT) +Pan parameter do?

(Output Pan) L63–0–R63 Adjusts the stereo location of the output sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does the (OUT) #Level parameter do?

(Output Level) 0–127 Adjusts the output level.

What is P-03: Enhancer?

[01H, 02H] The Enhancer controls the overtone structure of the high frequencies, adding sparkle and tightness to the sound.

What does the [ENHANCER] +Sensitivity parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the sensitivity of the enhancer.

What does the [ENHANCER] #Mix Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the ratio by which the overtones generated by the enhancer are combined with the direct sound.

What does the (OUTPUT) Low Gain parameter do?

-12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does the (OUTPUT) High Gain parameter do?

-12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does the (OUTPUT) Output Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the output level.

What is P-04: Humanizer?

[01H, 03H] This adds a vowel character to the sound, making it similar to a human voice.

What does the [DRIVE] Drive parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the depth of distortion.

What does the [DRIVE] Drive Switch parameter do?

Off/On Turns Drive on/off.

What does the [VOWEL] +Vowel parameter do?

a/i/u/e/o Selects the vowel.

What does the [VOWEL] Accel parameter do?

0–15 Adjusts the time over which the sound will move to the specified Vowel. Smaller values will require more time.

What does the [OUTPUT] L Gain parameter do?

(Low Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the low frequency gain.

What does the [OUTPUT] H Gain parameter do?

(High Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the high frequency gain.

What does the [OUTPUT] Output Pan parameter do?

L63–0–R63 Adjusts the stereo position of the output sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does the [OUTPUT] #Output Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the output volume.

What is P-05: Overdrive?

[01H, 10H] This effect creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by tube amplifiers.

What does the (OVERDRIVE] +Drive parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the degree of distortion.

What does the [AMP] Amp Type parameter do?

(Amp Simulator Type) Small/Built-in/Double Stack/Triple Stack Selects the type of guitar amp.

  • Small: small amp
  • Built-in: single-unit type amp
  • Double Stack: large double stack amp
  • Triple stack: large triple stack amp

What does the [AMP] Amp Switch parameter do?

Off/On Turns the Amp Type on/off.

What does the [OUTPUT] L Gain parameter do?

(Low Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does the [OUTPUT] H Gain parameter do?

(High Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does the [OUTPUT] #Output Pan parameter do?

L63–0–R63 Adjusts the stereo location of the output sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does the [OUTPUT] Output Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the output level.

What is P-06: Distortion?

[01H, 11H] This effect produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive.

What does the [DISTORTION] +Drive parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the degree of distortion.

What does the [AMP] Amp Type parameter do?

(Amp Simulator Type) Small/Built-in/Double Stack/Triple Stack Selects the type of guitar amp.

  • Small: small amp
  • Built-in: single-unit type amp
  • Double Stack: large double stack amp
  • Triple stack: large triple stack amp

What does the [AMP] Amp Switch parameter do?

Off/On Turns the Amp Type on/off.

What does the [OUTPUT] L Gain parameter do?

(Low Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does the [OUTPUT] H Gain parameter do?

(High Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does the [OUTPUT] #Output Pan parameter do?

L63–0–R63 Adjusts the stereo location of the output sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does the [OUTPUT] Output Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the output level.

What is P-07: Phaser?

[01H, 20H] A phaser adds a phase-shifted sound to the original sound, producing a twisting modulation that creates spaciousness and depth.

What does the [PHASER] +Manual parameter do?

00Hz–8.0kHz Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated.

What does the [PHASER] #Rate parameter do?

0.05–10.0(Hz) Adjusts the frequency (period) of modulation.

What does the [PHASER] Depth parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the depth of modulation.

What does the [PHASER] Resonance parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the amount of emphasis added to the frequency range surrounding the basic frequency determined by the Manual parameter setting.

What does the [OUTPUT] Mix Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the ratio by which the phase-shifted sound is combined with the direct sound.

What does the [OUTPUT] L Gain parameter do?

(Low Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does the [OUTPUT] H Gain parameter do?

(High Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does the [OUTPUT] Output Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the output level.

What is P-08: Auto Wah?

[01H, 21H] The Auto Wah cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre.

What does the [WAH] Filtype parameter do?

(Filter Type) LPF/BPF Selects the type of filter.

  • LPF: The wah effect will be applied over a wide frequency range.
  • BPF: The wah effect will be applied over a narrow frequency range.

What does the [WAH] Sens parameter do?

(Sensitivity) 0–127 Adjusts the sensitivity with which the filter is controlled. If this value is increased, the filter frequency will change more readily in response to the input level.

What does the [WAH] +Manual parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the center frequency from which the effect is applied.

What does the [WAH] Peak parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the amount of the wah effect that will occur in the vicinity of the center frequency. Lower settings will cause the effect to be applied in a broad area around the center frequency. Higher settings will cause the effect to be applied in a more narrow range. In the case of LPF, decreasing the value will cause the wah effect to change less.

What does the [MODULATION] #Rate parameter do?

0.05–10.0Hz Adjusts the speed of the modulation.

What does the [MODULATION] Depth parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the depth of the modulation.

What does the [MODULATION] Polarity parameter do?

Down/Up Sets the direction in which the frequency will change when the filter is modulated. With a setting of Up, the filter will change toward a higher frequency. With a setting of Down it will change toward a lower frequency.

What does the [OUTPUT] L Gain parameter do?

(Low Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the low frequency range for EQ.

What does the [OUTPUT] H Gain parameter do?

(High Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the high frequency range for EQ.

What does the [OUTPUT] Output Pan parameter do?

L63–0–R63 Adjusts the stereo location of the output sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does the [OUTPUT] Output Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the output level.

What is P-09: Rotary?

[01H, 22H] The Rotary effect simulates the sound of a classic rotary speakers. Since the movement of the high range and low range rotors can be set independently, the unique type of modulation characteristic of these speakers can be simulated quite closely. This effect is most suitable for electric organ.

What does the [LOW] Slow Rate parameter do?

(Low Frequency Slow Rate) 0.05–10.0Hz Adjusts the slow speed (Slow) of the low frequency rotor.

What does the [LOW] Fast Rate parameter do?

(Low Frequency Fast Rate) 0.05–10.0Hz Adjusts the fast speed (Fast) of the low frequency rotor.

What does the [LOW] Accel parameter do?

(Low Frequency Acceleration) 0–15 Adjusts the time it takes for the low frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow (or slow to fast) speed. Lower values will require longer times.

What does the [LOW] Level parameter do?

(Low Frequency Level) 0–127 Adjusts the volume of the low frequency rotor.

What does the [HIGH] Slow Rate parameter do?

(High Frequency Slow Rate) 0.05–10.0Hz Adjusts the slow speed (Slow) of the high frequency rotor.

What does the [HIGH] Fast Rate parameter do?

(High Frequency Fast Rate) 0.05–10.0Hz Adjusts the fast speed (Fast) of the high frequency rotor.

What does the [HIGH] Accel parameter do?

(High Frequency Acceleration) 0–15 Adjusts the time it takes for the high frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow (or slow to fast) speed. Lower values will require longer times.

What does the [HIGH] Level parameter do?

(High Frequency Level) 0–127 Adjusts the volume of the high frequency rotor.

What does the [SP] Separation parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the spatial dispersion of the sound.

What does the [SP] +Speed parameter do?

Slow/Fast Simultaneously switch the rotational speed of the low frequency rotor and high frequency rotor.

  • Slow: Slow down the rotation to the specified speed (the [Low] Slow Rate parameter/[High] Slow Rate parameter values).
  • Fast: Speed up the rotation to the specified speed (the [Low] Fast Rate parameter/[High] Fast Rate parameter values).

What does the [OUTPUT] Low Gain parameter do?

-12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the low frequency range for EQ.

What does the [OUTPUT] High Gain parameter do?

-12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the high frequency range for EQ.

What does the [OUTPUT] #Output Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the output level.

What is P-10: Stereo Flanger?

[01H, 23H] This is a stereo flanger. It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing. A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the flanged sound.

What does the [FIL] Pre Filter Type parameter do?

Off/LPF/HPF Selects the type of filter.

  • Off: a filter will not be used
  • LPF: cut the frequency range above the Cutoff parameter
  • HPF: cut the frequency range below the Cutoff parameter

What does the [FIL] Cutoff Freq. parameter do?

(Cutoff Frequency) 250Hz–8 kHz Adjusts the basic frequency of the filter.

What does the [FLANGR] Pre Dly parameter do?

(Pre Delay Time) 0–100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard.

What does the [FLANGR] +Rate parameter do?

0.05–10.0(Hz) Adjusts the rate of modulation.

What does the [FLANGR] Depth parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the depth of modulation.

What does the [FLANGR] #Feedback Level parameter do?

-98%–+98% Adjusts the amount (%) of the processed sound that is returned (fed back) into the input. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.

What does the [FLANGR] Phase parameter do?

0–180 Adjusts the spatial spread of the sound.

What does the [OUTPUT] Bal parameter do?

(Effect Balance) Dry100, Effect 0–Dry 0,Effect100 Adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does the [OUTPUT] L Gain parameter do?

(Low Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does the [OUTPUT] H Gain parameter do?

(High Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does the [OUTPUT] Output Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the output level.

What is P-11: Step Flanger?

[01H, 24H] The Step Flanger is an effect in which the flanger pitch changes in steps.

What does the [MOD] PreDelay Time parameter do?

0–100msec Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard.

What does the [MOD] Rate parameter do?

0.05–10.0Hz Adjusts the rate of modulation.

What does the [MOD] Depth parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the depth of modulation.

What does the [STEP FLANGER] +Feedback Level parameter do?

-98%–+98% Adjusts the amount (%) of the processed sound that is returned (fed back) into the input. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.

What does the [STEP FLANGER] Phase parameter do?

0–180 Adjusts the spatial spread of the sound.

What does the [STEP FLANGER] #Step Rate parameter do?

0.05–10.0Hz Adjusts the rate (period) of pitch change.

What does the [OUT] Bal parameter do?

(Effect balance) Dry100, Effect 0–Dry 0,Effect100 Adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does the [OUT] L Gain parameter do?

(Low Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does the [OUT] H Gain parameter do?

(High Gain) -12–+12(dB) Adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does the [OUT] Output Level parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the output level.

What is P-12: Tremolo?

[01H, 25H] Tremolo cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound.

What does the [TREMOLO] Modulation Wave parameter do?

Selects the type of modulation.

  • ///: The sound will be modulated like a triangle wave.
  • n…n.: The sound will be modulated like a square wave.
  • ././: The sound will be modulated like a sine wave.
  • /—–/—: The sound will be modulated like a sawtooth wave.

What does the [TREMOLO] +Modulation Rate parameter do?

0.05–10.0(Hz) Adjusts the speed of modulation.

What does the [TREMOLO] #Modulation Depth parameter do?

0–127 Adjusts the depth of modulation.

What does the Pre Filter Type do on the FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It selects the type of filter.

The options are:

  • Off: a filter will not be used
  • LPF: cut the frequency range above the cutoff
  • HPF: cut the frequency range below the cutoff

What does Cutoff Freq. (Cutoff Frequency) do on the FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the center frequency of the filter for the chorus sound.

What does PreDelay Time do on the FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard.

What does +Rate do on the FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the rate of modulation.

What does Depth do on the FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the depth of modulation.

What does Phase do on the FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the spatial spread of the sound.

What does #Bal (Effect Balance) do on the FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is Space D?

Space-Dis a multiple chorus that applies two-phase modulation in stereo. It gives no impression of modulation, but produces a transparent chorus effect.

What does PreDelay Time do on the SPACE D·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard.

What does +Rate do on the SPACE D·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the rate of modulation.

What does Depth do on the SPACE D·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the depth of modulation.

What does Phase do on the SPACE D·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the spatial spread of the sound.

What does #Bal (Effect Balance) do on the SPACE D·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the SPACE D·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the SPACE D·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the SPACE D·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is 3D Chorus?

This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound. The chorus sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right.

What does PreDelay Time do on the 3D CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard.

What does +Rate (Chorus Rate) do on the 3D CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the modulation speed of the chorus sound.

What does Depth (Chorus Depth) do on the 3D CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the modulation depth of the chorus sound.

What does Output Mode do on the 3D CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It specifies the method that will be used to hear the sound which is output to the OUTPUT jacks. The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select Speaker when using speakers, or Phones when using headphones.

What does #Bal (Effect balance) do on the 3D CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the 3D CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the 3D CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the 3D CHORUS-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is Stereo Delay?

This is a stereo delay.

What does TimeL (Delay time left) do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time from the original sound until the left delay sound is heard.

What does TimeR (Delay time right) do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time from the original sound until the right delay sound is heard.

What does Phase L (Phase left) do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It selects the phase of the left delay sound.

The options are:

  • Norm: Phase will not be changed.
  • Invert: Phase will be inverted.

What does Phase R (Phase right) do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It selects the phase of the right delay sound.

The options are:

  • Norm: Phase will not be changed.
  • Invert: Phase will be inverted.

What does +Feedback Level do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the proportion(%) of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.

What does Feedback Mode do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It selects the way in which processed sound is fed back into the effect.

The options are:

  • Norm: The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay, and the right delay sound into the right delay.
  • Cross: The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay, and the right delay sound into the left delay.

What does HF Damp do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut. If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback, set this parameter to Bypass.

What does #Bal (Effect balance) do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low gain) do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High gain) do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the DELAY-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is Modulation Delay?

This effect adds modulation to the delayed sound, producing an effect similar to a flanger.

What does Delay Time L (Delay Time Left) do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time from the original sound until the left delay sound is heard.

What does Delay Time R (Delay Time Right) do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time from the original sound until the right delay sound is heard.

What does Feedback Level do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the proportion (%) of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.

What does Feedback Mode do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It selects the way in which processed sound is fed back into the effect.

The options are:

  • Norm: The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay, and the right delay sound into the right delay.
  • Cross: The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay, and the right delay sound into the left delay.

What does HF Damp do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut. If you do not wish to cut the high frequencies of the feedback, set this parameter to Bypass.

What does +Modulation Rate do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the speed of the modulation.

What does Modulation Depth do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the depth of the modulation.

What does Modulation Phase do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the spatial spread of the sound.

What does #Bal (Effect Balance) do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the TIME·FB-MOD·OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is 3 Tap Delay (Triple tap delay)?

The Triple Tap Delay produces three delay sounds; center, left and right.

What does DelayTimeCenter do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from the direct sound until the center delay sound is heard.

What does DelayTime Left do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from the direct sound until the left delay sound is heard.

What does DelayTime Right do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from the direct sound until the right delay sound is heard.

What does +Feedback Level do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the proportion (%) of the Center Delay sound that is fed back into the effect. Negative (·) settings will invert the phase.

What does HF Damp do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

This adjusts the frequency at which the high range is cut when the Center Delay sound is returned to the input. If you do not wish to cut the high range, set this to Bypass.

What does Delay LevelCenter do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume of center delay sound.

What does Delay Level Left do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume of left delay sound.

What does Delay Level Right do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume of right delay sound.

What does #Bal (Effect Balance) do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is 4 Tap Delay (Quadruple tap delay)?

The Quadruple Tap Delay has four delays.

What does Time1 (Delay Time 1) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from the direct sound until delay 1 sound is heard.

What does Time2 (Delay Time 2) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from the direct sound until delay 2 sound is heard.

What does Time3 (Delay Time 3) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from the direct sound until delay 3 sound is heard.

What does Time4 (Delay Time 4) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from the direct sound until delay 4 sound is heard.

What does Level1 (Delay Level 1) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume of delay 1 sound.

What does Level2 (Delay Level 2) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume of delay 2 sound.

What does Level3 (Delay Level 3) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume of delay 3 sound.

What does Level4 (Delay Level 4) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume of delay 4 sound.

What does +Feedback Level do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the proportion (%) of the Delay 1 sound that is fed back into the effect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.

What does HF Damp do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

This adjusts the frequency at which the high range is cut when the Delay 1 sound is returned to the input. If you do not wish to cut the high range, set this to Bypass.

What does #Bal (Effect Balance) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is Time Ctrl Delay (Time control delay)?

This effect allows you to use a specified controller (the controller selected in Control Source display) to control the delay time and pitch in real time. Lengthening the delay time will lower the pitch, and shortening it will raise the pitch.

What does +Delay Time do on the TC DL Y-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from the direct sound until each delay sound is heard.

What does Acceleration do on the TC DL Y-FB-OUTPUT?

This parameter adjusts the speed over which the Delay Time will change from the current setting to a newly specified setting. The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change.

What does #Feedback Level do on the TC DL Y-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the proportion(%) of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.

What does HF Damp do on the TC DL Y-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut. If you do not wish to cut the high frequencies of the feedback, set this parameter to Bypass.

What does Effect Pan (Effect output pan) do on the TC DL Y-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the stereo location of the processed sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does Bal (Effect Balance) do on the TC DL Y-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the TC DL Y-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain} do on the TC DL Y-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the TC DL Y-FB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is Reverb?

The Reverb effect adds reverberation to the sound, simulating an acoustic space.

What does Type (Reverb Type} do on the REVERB-OUTPUT?

It selects the type of Reverb effect.

The options are:

  • Room 1 : dense reverb with short decay
  • Room 2: sparse reverb with short decay
  • Stage 1 : reverb with greater late reverberation
  • Stage 2: reverb with strong early reflections
  • Hall 1 : reverb with clear reverberation
  • Hall 2: reverb with rich reverberation

What does PreDelay Time do on the REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the reverb sound is heard.

What does + Time (Reverb Time} do on the REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time length of reverberation.

What does HF Damp do on the REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the frequency above which the reverberant sound will be cut. As the frequency is set lower, more of the high frequencies will be cut, resulting in a softer and more muted reverberation. If you do not want the high frequencies to be cut, set this parameter to Bypass.

What does #Bal (Effect Balance) do on the REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain} do on the REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is Gate Reverb?

Gate Reverb is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant sound is cut off before its natural length.

What does Reverb Type (Gate Reverb Type) do on the GATE REVERB-OUTPUT?

It selects the type of reverb.

The options are:

  • Norm: conventional gate reverb
  • Reverse: backwards reverb
  • Sweep1: the reverberant sound moves from right to left
  • Sweep2: the reverberant sound moves from left to right

What does PreDelay Time do on the GATE REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the reverb sound is heard.

What does Gate Time do on the GATE REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the time from when the reverb is heard until it disappears.

What does +Bal (Effect Balance) do on the GATE REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the GATE REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the GATE REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does #Output Level do on the GATE REVERB-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is 3D Delay?

This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound. The delay sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right.

What does DelayTimeCenter do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the time from the original sound until the center delay sound begins.

What does DelayTime Left do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the time from the original sound until the left delay sound begins.

What does DelayTime Right do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the time from the original sound until the right delay sound begins.

What does +Feedback Level (Delay Feedback Level) do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the amount (%) of the center delay sound that will be returned to the input. With negative(-) settings, the phase will be inverted.

What does HF Damp do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

This adjusts the frequency at which the high range is cut when the Center Delay sound is returned to the input. If you do not wish to cut the high range, set this to Bypass.

What does Delay LevelCenter do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the volume of the center delay sound.

What does Delay Level Left do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the volume of the left delay sound.

What does Delay Level Right do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the volume of the right delay sound.

What does Output Mode do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It specifies the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks. The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select Speaker when using speakers, or Phones when using headphones.

What does #Bal (Effect Balance) do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the TIME·LEVEL-FB·MODE-OUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is 2 Pitch Shifter (2-voice pitch shifter)?

A Pitch Shifter shifts the pitch of the original sound. This 2-voice pitch shifter has two pitch shifters, and can add two pitch shifted sounds to the original sound.

What does +Coarse 1 (Coarse Pitch 1) do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift 1 in semitone steps (-2-+1 octaves).

What does Fine1 (Fine Pitch 1) do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It makes fine adjustments to the pitch of Pitch Shift 1 in 2-cent steps (-100-+100 cents).

What does PreDelay Time 1 do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift 1 sound is heard.

What does Effect Outputpan1 do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the stereo location of the Pitch Shift 1 sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does #Coarse 2 (Coarse Pitch 2) do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift 2 in semitone steps (-2-+1 octaves).

What does Fine2 (Fine Pitch 2) do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It makes fine adjustments to the pitch of Pitch Shift 2 in 2-cent steps (-100-+100 cents).

What does PreDelay Time 2 do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift 2 sound is heard.

What does Effect Outputpan2 do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the stereo location of the Pitch Shift 2 sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does Pitch Shifter Mode do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response, but steadier pitch.

What does Level Balance do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the Pitch Shift 1 and Pitch Shift 2 sounds.

What does Bal (Effect Balance) do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the PITCH·DLY ·PAN-BAL·OUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is Fb Pitch Shifter (Feedback pitch shifter)?

This pitch shifter allows the pitch shifted sound to be returned into the effect.

What does +Coarse Pitch do on the PITCH-DLY-FB-PAN-OUT?

It adjusts the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in semitone steps (-2-+1 octaves).

What does Fine Pitch do on the PITCH-DLY-FB-PAN-OUT?

It makes fine adjustments to the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in 2-cent steps (-100-+100 cents).

What does #Feedback Level do on the PITCH-DLY-FB-PAN-OUT?

It adjusts the proportion(%) of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.

What does PreDelay Time do on the PITCH-DLY-FB-PAN-OUT?

It adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the pitch shifted sound is heard.

What does Pitch Shifter Mode do on the PITCH-DLY-FB-PAN-OUT?

Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response, but steadier pitch.

What does Effect Output Pan do on the PITCH-DLY-FB-PAN-OUT?

It adjusts the stereo location of the pitch shifted sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does Bal (Effect Balance) do on the PITCH-DLY-FB-PAN-OUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the PITCH-DLY-FB-PAN-OUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the PITCH-DLY-FB-PAN-OUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does Output Level do on the PITCH-DLY-FB-PAN-OUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is 3D Auto?

The 3D Auto effect rotates the location of the sound.

What does Azimuth do on the ROTATION-OUTPUT?

It sets the location at which the sound will stop when rotation is stopped. A setting of O positions the sound in the center.

What does +Speed do on the ROTATION-OUTPUT?

It sets the speed of rotation.

What does Clockwise do on the ROTATION-OUTPUT?

It sets the direction of rotation. A setting of"-" is counter­clockwise, and"+" is clockwise.

What does #Turn do on the ROTATION-OUTPUT?

This stops or starts the rotation. When this is turned On, the sound will rotate. When turned Off, rotation will stop at the location specified by Azimuth.

What does Output Mode do on the ROTATION-OUTPUT?

It specifies the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks. The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select Speaker when using speakers, or Phones when using headphones.

What does Output Level do on the ROTATION-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is 3D Manual?

This places the 3D effect at a desired location.

What does +Azimuth do on the AZIMUTH-OUTPUT?

It specifies the location. A setting of O positions the sound in the center.

What does Output Mode do on the AZIMUTH-OUTPUT?

It Specifics the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks. The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select Speaker when using speakers, or Phones when using headphones.

What does #Output Level do on the AZIMUTH-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is Lo-Fi 1?

Lo-Fi 1 is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound quality.

What does Pre Filter Type do on the LOFI-OUTPUT?

It specifics the type of filter that will be applied before the sound passes through the Lo-Fi effect.

What does Lo-Fi Type do on the LOFI-OUTPUT?

Degrade the sound quality. The sound quality will become poorer as this value is increased.

What does Post Filter Type do on the LOFI-OUTPUT?

It specifies the type of filter that will be applied after the sound passes through the Lo-Fi effect.

What does +Bal (Effect Balance) do on the LOFI-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the volume balance between the direct and the processed sound.

What does L Gain (Low Gain) do on the LOFI-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the low frequency range.

What does H Gain (High Gain) do on the LOFI-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the gain of the high frequency range.

What does #Pan (Output Pan) do on the LOFI-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the stereo location of the output sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does Level (Output Level) do on the LOFI-OUTPUT?

It adjusts the output level.

What is Lo-Fi 2?

Lo-Fi 2 is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound quality and allows a variety of noise to be added

If the Radio Dt’l1111e, W/P Noise Le11el (White/Pink Noise Level), Disc Noise Level, or Hum Level settings arc raised what happens?

There will be noise even when the input sound is silent.

What does Lo-Fi Type do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

Degrade the sound quality. The sound quality will become poorer as this value is increased.

What does Filter Type do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It specifies the type of filler that is applied after the sound passes through the Lo-Fi effect.

What does Cutoff Freq. (Cutoff Frequency) do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It specifies the cutoff frequency of the filler that is applied after the sound passes through the Lo-Fi effect.

What does +Radio Detune do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

This simulates the tuning noise of a radio. As this value is raised, the tuning will drift further.

What does Radio Noise Level do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It adjusts the volume of the radio noise.

What does White/Pink Sel (White/Pink Noise Select) do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It selects either white noise or pink noise.

What does W/P LPF (White/Pink Noise LPF) do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It specifies the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter that is applied to the white noise or pink noise.

What does W/P Noise Level (White/Pink Noise Level) do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It specifies the volume of the white noise or pink noise.

What does Disc Noise Type do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It selects the type of record noise. The frequency at which the noise is heard will depend on the selected type.

What does Disc Noise LPF do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It specifies the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter that is applied to the record noise.

What does Disc Noise Level do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It specifies the volume of the record noise.

What does Hum Noise Type do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It selects the type of hum noise.

What does Hum Noise LPF do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It specifies the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter that is applied to the hum noise.

What does Hum Noise Level do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It specifies the volume of the hum noise.

What does Mono/Stereo Sw (Mono/Stereo Switch) do on the LOFI-RD·WP-D-HM-MS·OUT?

It selects whether the effect sound will be monaural or stereo.

What does Fb (Delay Feedback Level) adjust?

Fb (Delay Feedback Level) adjusts the proportion (%) of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.

What does HF (Delay HF Damp) adjust?

HF (Delay HF Damp) adjusts the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the effect will be cut. If you do not wish to cut the high frequencies of the feedback, set this parameter to Bypass.

What does #Bal (Delay Balance) adjust?

#Bal (Delay Balance) adjusts the volume balance between the sound that’s been routed through the delay versus that which hasn’t. With a setting of “Dry100, Delay 0,” only the distortion sound will be output, and with a setting of “Dry 0, Delay100,” the distortion sound that’s been routed through the delay will be output.

What does [DS) Drive (Distortion Drive) adjust?

[DS) Drive (Distortion Drive) adjusts the degree of distortion. The volume will change together with the degree of distortion.

What does +Pan (Distortion Output Pan) adjust?

+Pan (Distortion Output Pan) adjusts the stereo location of the distortion sound. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

What does Amp Type (Distortion Amp Simulator Type) select?

Amp Type (Distortion Amp Simulator Type) selects the type of guitar amp.

  • Small: small amp
  • Built-in: single-unit type amp
  • Double Stack:large double stack amp
  • Triple Stack: large triple stack amp

What does Amp Switch (Distortion Amp Switch) do?

Amp Switch (Distortion Amp Switch) turns DS Amp on/off.

What does [CHORUS] PreDelay Time (Chorus Pre Delay Time) adjust?

[CHORUS] PreDelay Time (Chorus Pre Delay Time) adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard.

What does Rate (Chorus Rate) adjust?

Rate (Chorus Rate) adjusts the modulation speed of the chorus effect.

What does Depth (Chorus Depth) adjust?

Depth (Chorus Depth) adjusts the modulation depth of the chorus effect.

What does #Bal (Chorus Balance) adjust?

#Bal (Chorus Balance) adjusts the volume balance between the sound that’s been routed through the chorus versus that which hasn’t. With a setting of “Dry100, Chorus 0,” only the distortion sound will be output, and with a setting of “Dry 0, Chorus100,” the distortion sound that’s been routed through the chorus will be output.

What does [FLANGER] PreDly (Flanger Pre Delay) adjust?

[FLANGER] PreDly (Flanger Pre Delay) adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard.

What does Rate (Flanger Rate) adjust?

Rate (Flanger Rate) adjusts the modulation speed of the flanger effect.

What does Depth (Flanger Depth) adjust?

Depth (Flanger Depth) adjusts the modulation depth of the flanger effect.

What does Fb (Flanger Feedback Level) adjust?

Fb (Flanger Feedback Level) adjusts the proportion (%) of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase.

What does #Bal (Flanger Balance) adjust?

#Bal (Flanger Balance) adjusts the volume balance between the sound that’s been routed through the flanger versus that which hasn’t. With a setting of “Dry100, Flanger 0,” only the distortion sound will be output, and with a setting of “Dry 0, Flanger100,” the distortion sound that’s been routed through the flanger will be output.

What does [ENHANCER] +Sensitivity (Enhancer Sensitivity) adjust?

[ENHANCER] +Sensitivity (Enhancer Sensitivity) adjusts the sensitivity of the enhancer.

What does Mix Level (Enhancer Mix Level) adjust?

Mix Level (Enhancer Mix Level) adjusts the ratio by which the overtones generated by the enhancer are combined with the direct sound.

What does +OD Drive adjust?

+OD Drive adjusts the depth of distortion. The volume will change together with the depth of distortion.

What does Overdrive Switch do?

Overdrive Switch turns the Overdrive effect on/off.

What does L Gain (EQ Low Gain) adjust?

L Gain (EQ Low Gain) adjusts the low range gain of the equalizer.

What does H Gain (EQ High Gain) adjust?

H Gain (EQ High Gain) adjusts the high-range gain of the equalizer.

What does Mid Frequency (EQ Mid Frequency) set?

Mid Frequency (EQ Mid Frequency) sets the center frequency for the equalizer mid-range.

What does Mid Q (EQ Mid Q) adjust?

Mid Q (EQ Mid Q) adjusts the width of the area centered at the Mid Frequency setting in which the gain will be affected. The area affected will become narrower as this value is increased.

What does MidGain (EQ Mid Gain) adjust?

MidGain (EQ Mid Gain) adjusts the gain of the area specified by the Mid Frequency parameter and the Mid Q parameter.

What does Slow Rate (Rotary Low Frequency Slow Rate) adjust?

Slow Rate (Rotary Low Frequency Slow Rate) adjusts the speed of the low-range rotor for the low-speed (Slow) setting.

What does Fast Rate (Rotary Low Frequency Fast Rate) adjust?

Fast Rate (Rotary Low Frequency Fast Rate) adjusts the speed of the low-range rotor for the high-speed (Fast) setting.

What does Accel (Rotary Low Frequency Acceleration) adjust?

Accel (Rotary Low Frequency Acceleration) adjusts the time over which the rotation speed of the low-range rotor will change from low-speed to high-speed (or high-speed to low-speed) rotation. Smaller values will require greater time to reach the new rotational speed.

What does Level (Rotary Low Frequency Level) adjust?

Level (Rotary Low Frequency Level) adjusts the volume of the low-range rotor.

What does Slow Rate (Rotary High Frequency Slow Rate) adjust?

Slow Rate (Rotary High Frequency Slow Rate) adjusts the speed of the high-range rotor for the low-speed (Slow) setting.

What does Fast Rate (Rotary High Frequency Fast Rate) adjust?

Fast Rate (Rotary High Frequency Fast Rate) adjusts the speed of the high-range rotor for the high-speed (Fast) setting.

What does Accel (Rotary High Frequency Acceleration) adjust?

Accel (Rotary High Frequency Acceleration) adjusts the time over which the rotation speed of the high-range rotor will change from low-speed to high-speed (or high-speed to low-speed) rotation. Smaller values will require greater time to reach the new rotational speed.

What does Level (Rotary High Frequency Level) adjust?

Level (Rotary High Frequency Level) adjusts the volume of the high-range rotor.

What does RT Separation (Rotary Separation) adjust?

RT Separation (Rotary Separation) adjusts the spatial spread of the rotary sound.

What does #RT Speed (Rotary Speed) do?

#RT Speed (Rotary Speed) simultaneously switches the rotational speed of both the low-range and the high-range rotors.

  • Slow: Slow down the rotation to the specified speeds ([RTL] Slow Rate parameter/[RT HJ Slow Rate parameter values).
  • Fast: Speed up the rotation to the specified speeds ([RT L] Fast Rate parameter/[RT HJ Fast Rate parameter values).

What does Output Level adjust?

Output Level adjusts the output level.

What does Attack (Compressor Attack) adjust?

Attack (Compressor Attack) adjusts the time over which the sound will rise after input.

What does Sustain (Compressor Sustain) adjust?

Sustain (Compressor Sustain) adjusts the time over which low-level sounds are boosted until they reach a specified volume. Increasing the value will shorten the time. When the value is modified, the level will also change.

What does Level (Compressor Level) adjust?

Level (Compressor Level) adjusts the volume of the compressor sound.

What does Switch (Compressor Switch) do?

Switch (Compressor Switch) turns the compressor on/off.

What does OD Select do?

OD Select selects either Overdrive or Distortion.

What does OD Sw (OD Switch) do?

OD Sw (OD Switch) turns Overdrive or Distortion on/off.

What does Amp (OD Amp Simulator Type) select?

Amp (OD Amp Simulator Type) selects the type of guitar amp.

  • Small: small amp
  • Bltln: single-unit type amp
  • 2-Stk: large double stack amp
  • 3-Stk: large triple stack amp

What does Amp Sw (OD Amp Switch) do?

Amp Sw (OD Amp Switch) turns OD Amp on/off.

What does OD Low Gain adjust?

OD Low Gain adjusts the low-range gain.

What does OD High Gain adjust?

OD High Gain adjusts the high-range gain.

What does CF Select do?

CF Select selects either Chorus or Flanger.

What does Rate adjust?

Rate adjusts the speed of modulation.

What does Depth adjust?

Depth adjusts the depth of modulation.

What does Fb (CF Feedback) adjust?

Fb (CF Feedback) adjusts the amount (%) of the flanger sound that is returned to the input. Negative (-) values will invert the phase. In the case of Chorus, this will have no effect.

What does Mix (CF Mix) adjust?

Mix (CF Mix) adjusts the volume of the chorus or flanger sound.

What does Delay Time adjust?

Delay Time adjusts the time from the original sound until the delay sound is heard.

What does Fb (Delay Feedback Level) adjust?

Fb (Delay Feedback Level) adjusts the amount of the delay sound that is returned to the input.

What does #Mix (Delay Mix) adjust?

#Mix (Delay Mix) adjusts the volume of the delay sound.

What does Filtype (Wah Filter Type) select?

Filtype (Wah Filter Type) selects the type of filter.

  • LPF: The wah effect will be produced over a broad frequency range.
  • BPF: The wah effect will be produced in a narrow frequency range.

What does Sw (Wah Switch) do?

Sw (Wah Switch) turns Wah on/off.

What does +Manual (Wah Manual) set?

+Manual (Wah Manual) sets the center frequency at which the effect will be produced.

What does Peak adjust?

Peak adjusts the way in which the wah effect will be applied to the region of the center frequency. Lower settings will produce a wah effect in a broad area around the center frequency, and higher settings will produce a wah effect in a narrower area around the center frequency.

What does Sw (Auto-Wah Switch) do?

Sw (Auto-Wah Switch) turns Auto-way on/off.

What does Rate (Auto-Wah Rate) adjust?

Rate (Auto-Wah Rate) adjusts the modulation speed of the auto-wah.

What does Depth (Auto-Wah Depth) adjust?

Depth (Auto-Wah Depth) adjusts the modulation depth of the auto-wah.

What does HF Damp (Delay HF Dump) adjust?

HF Damp (Delay HF Dump) adjusts the frequency at which the high range will be cut from the delay sound that is returned to the input. If you do not wish to cut the high range of the returned sound, select Bypass.

How do you turn OD Amp on/off?

Turn OD Amp on/off using the Amp Sw (OD Amp Switch).

How do you adjust the low-range gain of the equalizer?

Adjust the low-range gain of the equalizer with the L Gain (EQ Low Gain) parameter. The range is -12-+12 (dB).

How do you adjust the high-range gain of the equalizer?

Adjust the high-range gain of the equalizer with the H Gain (EQ High Gain) parameter. The range is -12-+12 (dB).

How do you set the center frequency for the equalizer mid-range?

Set the center frequency for the equalizer mid-range using the Mid Frequency (EQ Mid Frequency) parameter. The range is 200Hz-6.3kHz.

How do you adjust the width of the area centered at the Mid Frequency setting in which the gain will be affected?

Adjust the width of the area centered at the Mid Frequency setting in which the gain will be affected with the Mid Q (EQ Mid Q) parameter. The area affected will become narrower as this value is increased. Values are 0.5/1.0/2.0/4.0/9.0.

How do you adjust the gain of the area specified by the Mid Frequency parameter and the Mid Q parameter?

Adjust the gain of the area specified by the Mid Frequency parameter and the Mid Q parameter using the Mid Gain (EQ Mid Gain). The range is -12-+12.

How do you select either Chorus or Flanger?

Select either Chorus of Flanger using the CF Select (CF Select) parameter.

How do you adjust the speed of modulation for the chorus or flanger?

Adjust the speed of modulation for the chorus or flanger with the Rate parameter. The range is 0.05-6.40(Hz).

How do you adjust the depth of modulation for the chorus or flanger?

Adjust the depth of modulation for the chorus of flanger with the Depth parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the amount (%) of the flanger sound that will be returned to the input?

Adjust the amount (%) of the flanger sound that will be returned to the input using the Fb (CF Feedback Level) parameter. Negative (-) values will invert the phase. In the case of Chorus, this will have no effect. The range is -98%/+98%.

How do you adjust the volume of the chorus or flanger sound?

Adjust the volume of the chorus or flanger sound using the Mix parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the output level?

Adjust the output level using the Output Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the depth of the enhancer?

Adjust the depth of the enhancer with the Sensitivity (Enhancer Sensitivity) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the level at which the overtones generated by the enhancer will be mixed with the direct sound?

Adjust the level at which the overtones generated by the enhancer will be mixed with the direct sound using the Mix Level (Enhancer Mix Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the center frequency at which the sound will be modulated?

Adjust the center frequency at which the sound will be modulated using the Manual (Phaser Manual) parameter. The range is 100Hz-8.0kHz.

How do you adjust the modulation speed?

Adjust the modulation speed using the Rate (Phaser Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-6.40Hz.

How do you adjust the modulation depth?

Adjust the modulation depth using the Depth (Phaser Depth) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the emphasis for the region around the center frequency specified by the PH Man parameter?

Adjust the emphasis for the region around the center frequency specified by the PH Man parameter with the Reso (Phaser Resonance) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the proportion of the phase-shifted sound that will be mixed with the direct sound?

Adjust the proportion of the phase-shifted sound that will be mixed with the direct sound using the Mix (Phaser Mix) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you cut the high frequency range of the chorus or flanger sound?

Cut the high frequency range of the chorus or flanger sound using the LPF (CF Low Pass Filter) parameter. The range is 250Hz-6.3kHz/Bypass.

How do you adjust the time from the direct sound until the chorus or flanger sound is heard?

Adjust the time from the direct sound until the chorus of flanger sound is heard with the Dly (CF Pre Delay) parameter. The range is 0-100ms.

How do you adjust the amount (%) of the flanger sound that will be returned to the input?

Adjust the amount (%) of the flanger sound that will be returned to the input using the Fb (CF Feedback Level) parameter. Negative (-) values will invert the phase. In the case of Chorus, this will have no effect. The range is -98%/+98%.

How do you adjust the volume of the effect sound?

Adjust the volume of the effect sound using the Mix parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the modulation speed?

Adjust the modulation speed using the CF Mod Rate parameter. The range is 0.05-6.40Hz.

How do you adjust the modulation depth?

Adjust the modulation depth using the CF Mod Depth parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you select either Tremolo or Pan?

Select either Tremolo or Pan using the TP Select parameter.

How do you adjust the modulation speed?

Adjust the modulation speed using the Rate (TP Modulation Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-6.40(Hz).

How do you adjust the modulation depth?

Adjust the modulation depth with the Depth (TP Modulation Depth) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you select the way in which tremolo or pan will be modulated?

Select the way in which tremolo or pan will be modulated using the Wave (TP Modulation Wave) parameter.

  • "/"v"v : The sound will be modulated like a triangle wave.

  • .n…n.: The sound will be modulated like a square wave.

  • The sound will be modulated like a sine wave.

  • …/l…–1~: The sound will be modulated like a sawtooth wave.

How do you turn tremolo or pan on/ off?

Turn tremolo or pan on/off using the Sw (TP Switch).

How do you adjust the output level?

Adjust the output level using the Output Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you set the frequency at which modulation will be applied?

Set the frequency at which modulation will be applied using the Modulation Freq. (RM Modulation Frequency) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the balance between the direct and the ring modulated sound?

Adjust the balance between the direct and the ring modulated sound using the Bal (RM Balance) parameter. Values are Dry100, RingM 0-Dry 0, RingM100.

How do you adjust the low range gain of the equalizer?

Adjust the low range gain of the equalizer with the L Gain (EQ Low Gain) parameter. The range is -12-+12(dB).

How do you adjust the high-range gain of the equalizer?

Adjust the high-range gain of the equalizer with the H Gain (EQ High Gain) parameter. The range is -12-+12(dB).

How do you set the center frequency for the equalizer mid-range?

Set the center frequency for the equalizer mid-range using the Mid Frequency (EQ Mid Frequency) parameter. The range is 200Hz-6.3kHz.

How do you adjust the width of the area centered at the Mid Frequency setting in which the gain will be affected?

Adjust the width of the area centered at the Mid Frequency setting in which the gain will be affected with the Mid Q (EQ Mid Q) parameter. The area affected will become narrower as this value is increased. Values are 0.5/1.0/2.0/4.0/9.0.

How do you adjust the gain of the area specified by the Mid Frequency parameter and the Mid Q parameter?

Adjust the gain of the area specified by the Mid Frequency parameter and the Mid Q parameter with the MidGain (EQ Mid Gain). The range is -12-+12(dB).

How do you adjust the amount of pitch shift in semitone steps?

Adjust the amount of pitch shift in semitone steps (-2 to +1 octaves) using the Coarse (PS Coarse Pitch) parameter. The range is -24-0-+12.

How do you make fine adjustments to the pitch shift?

Make fine adjustments to the pitch shift in 2-cent steps (-100 to +100cents) using the Fine (PS Fine Pitch) parameter. The range is -100-0-+100.

How do you adjust the response of the pitch shifter?

Adjust the response of the pitch shifter using the Pitch Shifter Mode. As this value is increased, the response will become slower but the sound will be more stable. The range is 1-5.

How do you adjust the volume balance between the direct and the pitch shifted sound?

Adjust the volume balance between the direct and the pitch shifted sound using the Bal (PS Balance). Values are Dry100, Pitch$ 0-Dry 0, PitchS100.

How do you sets the center frequency at which the phaser sound will be modulated?

Set the center frequency at which the phaser sound will be modulated using the Manual (Phaser Manual) parameter. The range is 100Hz-8.0kHz.

How do you adjust the modulation speed of the phaser?

Adjust the modulation speed of the phaser with the Rate (Phaser Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-6.40(Hz).

How do you adjust the modulation depth of the phaser?

Adjust the modulation depth of the phaser with the Depth (Phaser Depth) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the emphasis for the region in the vicinity of the center frequency specified by the PH Man parameter?

Adjust the emphasis for the region in the vicinity of the center frequency specified by the PH Man parameter with the Reso (Phaser Resonance) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the proportion at which the phase-shifted sound will be mixed with the original sound?

Adjust the proportion at which the phase-shifted sound will be mixed with the original sound using the Mix (Phaser Mix) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the time from the original sound until the delay sound is heard?

Adjust the time from the original sound until the delay sound is heard using the Delay Time parameter. The range is 0-635msec.

How do you adjust the amount of the delay sound that is returned to the input?

Adjust the amount of the delay sound that is returned to the input with the Feedback (Delay Feedback Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the proportion at which the delay sound is mixed with the direct sound?

Adjust the proportion at which the delay sound is mixed with the direct sound using the Mix (Delay Mix Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the output level?

Adjust the output level using the Output Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How can a parallel-connected multi-effect be used as two separate effects?

A parallel-connected multi-effect can be used as two separate effects by following these steps:

  1. Assign " 000/028 Clean.Gt" to part A01, and " 000/017 Organ 1" to part A02.
  2. Set part A01 PAN to L63, and part A02 PAN to R63.
  3. Select multi-effect P-60 OD, Rotary.
  4. Apply the multi-effect to part A01 and part A02.
  5. Set the OD Output Pan and RT Output Pan parameters of the P-60 OD, Rotary multi-effect.

How do you adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard?

Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard using the PreDelay Time (Chorus Pre Delay) parameter. The range is 0-100msec.

How do you adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect?

Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect with the Rate (Chorus Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-10.0Hz.

How do you adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect?

Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect with the Depth (Chorus Depth) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the volume balance between the direct and the chorus sound?

Adjust the volume balance between the direct and the chorus sound using the Bal (Chorus Balance) parameter. Values are Dry100, Chorus 0-Dry 0, Chorus100.

How do you adjust the stereo position of the chorus sound?

Adjust the stereo position of the chorus sound with the Pan (Chorus Output Pan) parameter. L63 is for left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the volume of the chorus sound?

Adjust the volume of the chorus sound using the Level (Chorus Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard?

Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard with the Time (Delay Time) parameter. The range is 0-500msec.

How do you adjust the proportion (%) of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input?

Adjust the proportion (%) of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input using the Feedback Level (Delay Feedback Level) parameter. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase. The range is -98%/+98%.

How do you adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut?

Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut with the HF Damp (Delay HF Damp) parameter. If you do not wish to cut the high frequencies of the feedback, set this parameter to Bypass. The range is 315Hz-8kHz/Bypass.

How do you adjust the volume balance between the direct and the delay sound?

Adjust the volume balance between the direct and the delay sound using the Bal (Delay Balance) parameter. Values are Dry100, Delay 0-Dry 0, Delay100.

How do you adjust the stereo position of the delay sound?

Adjust the stereo position of the delay sound using the Pan (Delay Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the volume of the delay sound?

Adjust the volume of the delay sound using the Level (Delay Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the output level?

Adjust the output level with the Output Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard?

Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard with the PreDelay Time (Flanger Pre Delay) parameter. The range is 0-100msec.

How do you adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect?

Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect using the Rate (Flanger Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-10.0Hz.

How do you adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect?

Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect using the Depth (Flanger Depth) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the proportion (%) of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect?

Adjust the proportion (%) of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect with the Feedback Level (Flanger Feedback Level) parameter. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase. The range is -98%/+98%.

How do you adjust the volume balance between the direct and the flanger sound?

Adjust the volume balance between the direct and the flanger sound using the Bal (Flanger Balance) parameter. Values are Dry100, Finger 0-Dry 0, Flnger100.

How do you adjust the stereo position of the flanger sound?

Adjust the stereo position of the flanger sound using the Pan (Flanger Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the volume of the flanger sound?

Adjust the volume of the flanger sound with the Level (Flanger Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard?

Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard with the Time (Delay Time) parameter. The range is 0-500msec.

How do you adjust the proportion (%) of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input?

Adjust the proportion (%) of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input with the Feedback Level (Delay Feedback Level) parameter. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase. The range is -98%/+98%.

How do you adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut?

Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut using the HF Damp (Delay HF Damp) parameter. If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the delay feedback, set this parameter to Bypass. The range is 315Hz-8kHz/Bypass.

How do you adjust the volume balance between the direct and the delay sound?

Adjust the volume balance between the direct and the delay sound using the Bal (Delay Balance) parameter. Values are Dry100, Delay 0-Dry 0, Delay100.

How do you adjust the stereo position of the delay sound?

Adjust the stereo position of the delay sound using the Pan (Delay Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the volume of the delay sound?

Adjust the volume of the delay sound using the Level (Delay Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the output level?

Adjust the output level with the Output Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard?

Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard using the PreDelay Time (Chorus Pre Delay Time) parameter. The range is 0-100msec.

How do you adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect?

Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect using the Rate (Chorus Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-10.0Hz.

How do you adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect?

Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect with the Depth (Chorus Depth) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the volume balance between the direct and the chorus sound?

Adjust the volume balance between the direct and the chorus sound with the Bal (Chorus Balance) parameter. Values are Dry100, Chorus 0-Dry 0, Chorus100.

How do you adjust the stereo position of the chorus sound?

Adjust the stereo position of the chorus sound using the Pan (Chorus Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the volume of the chorus sound?

Adjust the volume of the chorus sound using the Level (Chorus Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard?

Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard using the PreDelay Time (Flanger Pre Delay Time) parameter. The range is 0-100msec.

How do you adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect?

Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect using the Rate (Flanger Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-10.0Hz.

How do you adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect?

Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect with the Depth (Flanger Depth) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the proportion (%) of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect?

Adjust the proportion (%) of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect using the Feedback Level (Flanger Feedback Level) parameter. Negative (-) settings will invert the phase. The range is -98%/+98%.

How do you adjust the volume balance between the direct and the flanger sound?

Adjust the volume balance between the direct and the flanger sound using the Bal (Flanger Balance) parameter. Values are Dry100, Finger 0-Dry 0, Flnger100.

How do you adjust the stereo position of the flanger sound?

Adjust the stereo position of the flanger sound with the Pan (Flanger Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the volume of the flanger sound?

Adjust the volume of the flanger sound using the Level (Flanger Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the output level?

Adjust the output level using the Output Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you select either Overdrive or Distortion for set 1?

Select either Overdrive or Distortion for set 1 using the OD 1 Select parameter. Values are Odrv/Dist.

How do you adjust the depth of distortion for set 1?

Adjust the depth of distortion for set 1 using the Drive (OD 1 Drive) parameter. The volume will change together with the depth of distortion. The range is 0-127.

How do you select the type of guitar amp for set 1?

Select the type of guitar amp for set 1 using the Amp (OD 1 Amp Simulator Type) parameter.

  • Small: small amp
  • Bltln: single-unit type amp
  • 2-Stk: large double stack amp
  • 3-Stk: large triple stack amp

How do you turn OD 1 Amp on/off?

Turn OD 1 Amp on/off using the Amp Sw (OD 1 Amp Switch) parameter.

How do you set the stereo location of the overdrive or distortion sound for set 1?

Set the stereo location of the overdrive or distortion sound for set 1 with the Pan (OD 1 Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the overdrive or distortion volume for set 1?

Adjust the overdrive or distortion volume for set 1 using the Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you select either Overdrive or Distortion for set 2?

Select either Overdrive or Distortion for set 2 using the OD 2 Select (OD 2 Select) parameter. Values are Odrv/Dist.

How do you adjust the depth of distortion for set 2?

Adjust the depth of distortion for set 2 using the Drive (OD 2 Drive) parameter. The volume will change together with the depth of distortion. The range is 0-127.

How do you select the type of guitar amp for set 2?

Select the type of guitar amp for set 2 with the Amp (OD 2 Amp Simulator Type) parameter.

  • Small: small amp
  • Bltln: single-unit type amp
  • 2-Stk: large double stack amp
  • 3-Stk: large triple stack amp

How do you turn OD 2 Amp on/ off?

Turn OD 2 Amp on/off using the Amp Sw (OD 2 Amp Switch).

How do you set the stereo location of the overdrive or distortion sound for set 2?

Set the stereo location of the overdrive or distortion sound for set 2 with the Pan (OD 2 Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the overdrive or distortion volume for set 2?

Adjust the overdrive or distortion volume for set 2 with the Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the output level?

Adjust the output level using the Output Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you select either Overdrive or Distortion?

Select either Overdrive or Distortion using the OD Select (OD Select) parameter. Values are Odrv/Dist.

How do you adjust the depth of overdrive or distortion?

Adjust the depth of overdrive or distortion using the Drive (OD Drive) parameter. The volume will change together with the depth of distortion. The range is 0-127.

How do you select the type of guitar amp for overdrive or distortion?

Select the type of guitar amp for overdrive or distortion using the Amp (OD Amp Simulator Type) parameter.

  • Small: small amp
  • Bltln: single-unit type amp
  • 2-Stk: large double stack amp
  • 3-Stk: large triple stack amp

How do you turn the OD Amp parameter on/ off?

Turn the OD Amp parameter on/off with the Amp Sw (OD Amp Switch).

How do you set the stereo location of the overdrive or distortion sound?

Set the stereo location of the overdrive or distortion sound using the Pan (OD Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the volume of the overdrive or distortion sound?

Adjust the volume of the overdrive or distortion sound with the Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the speed of the low-range rotor for the low-speed (Slow) setting?

Adjust the speed of the low-range rotor for the low-speed (Slow) setting with the Slow Rate (Rotary Low Frequency Slow Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-10.0Hz.

How do you adjust the speed of the low-range rotor for the high-speed (Fast) setting?

Adjust the speed of the low-range rotor for the high-speed (Fast) setting using the Fast Rate (Rotary Low Frequency Fast Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-10.0Hz.

How do you adjust the time over which the rotation speed of the low-range rotor will change from low-speed to high-speed (or high-speed to low-speed) rotation?

Adjust the time over which the rotation speed of the low-range rotor will change from low-speed to high-speed (or high-speed to low-speed) rotation with the Accel (Rotary Low Frequency Acceleration) parameter. Smaller values will require greater time to reach the new rotational speed. The range is 0-15.

How do you adjust the volume of the low-range rotor?

Adjust the volume of the low-range rotor using the Level (Rotary Low Frequency Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the speed of the high-range rotor for the low-speed (Slow) setting?

Adjust the speed of the high-range rotor for the low-speed (Slow) setting using the Slow Rate (Rotary High Frequency Slow Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-10.0Hz.

How do you adjust the speed of the high-range rotor for the high-speed (Fast) setting?

Adjust the speed of the high-range rotor for the high-speed (Fast) setting with the Fast Rate (Rotary High Frequency Fast Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-10.0Hz.

How do you adjust the time over which the rotation speed of the high-range rotor will change from low-speed to high-speed (or high-speed to low-speed) rotation?

Adjust the time over which the rotation speed of the high-range rotor will change from low-speed to high-speed (or high-speed to low-speed) rotation using the Accel (Rotary High Frequency Acceleration) parameter. Smaller values will require greater time to reach the new rotational speed. The range is 0-15.

How do you adjust the volume of the high-range rotor?

Adjust the volume of the high-range rotor with the Level (Rotary High Frequency Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the spatial spread of the rotary sound?

Adjust the spatial spread of the rotary sound using the Separation (Rotary Separation) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you simultaneously switch the rotational speed of both the low-range and the high-range rotors?

Simultaneously switch the rotational speed of both the low-range and the high-range rotors using the Speed parameter.

  • Slow: Slow down the rotation to the specified speeds ([RTL] Slow Rate parameter/[RT H] Slow Rate parameter values).

  • Fast: Speed up the rotation to the specified speeds ([RT L] Fast Rate parameter/[RT H] Fast Rate parameter values).

How do you adjust the stereo position of the rotary sound?

Adjust the stereo position of the rotary sound using the Pan (Rotary Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the volume of the rotary sound?

Adjust the volume of the rotary sound using the Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the output level?

Adjust the output level using the Output Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you select either Overdrive or Distortion?

Select either Overdrive or Distortion with the OD Select (OD Select) parameter. Values are Odrv/Dist.

How do you adjust the depth of distortion?

Adjust the depth of distortion with the Drive (OD Drive) parameter. The volume will change together with the depth of distortion. The range is 0-127.

How do you select the type of guitar amp?

Select the type of guitar amp using the Amp (OD Amp Simulator Type) parameter.

  • Small: small amp
  • Bltln: single-unit type amp
  • 2-Stk: large double stack amp
  • 3-Stk: large triple stack amp

How do you turn the OD Amp parameter on/ off?

Turn the OD Amp parameter on/off using the Amp Sw (OD Amp Switch) parameter.

How do you set the stereo location of the overdrive or distortion sound?

Set the stereo location of the overdrive or distortion sound with the Pan (OD Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How do you adjust the overdrive or distortion volume?

Adjust the overdrive or distortion volume with the Level parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the center frequency at which the sound will be modulated?

Adjust the center frequency at which the sound will be modulated using the Manual (Phaser Manual) parameter. The range is 100Hz-8.0kHz.

How do you adjust the modulation speed?

Adjust the modulation speed using the Rate (Phaser Rate) parameter. The range is 0.05-10.0Hz.

How do you adjust the modulation depth?

Adjust the modulation depth using the Depth (Phaser Depth) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the emphasis for the region around the center frequency specified by the PH Man parameter?

Adjust the emphasis for the region around the center frequency specified by the PH Man parameter with the Resonance (Phaser Resonance) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you adjust the proportion of the phase-shifted sound that will be mixed with the direct sound?

Adjust the proportion of the phase-shifted sound that will be mixed with the direct sound with the Mix Level (Phaser Mix Level) parameter. The range is 0-127.

How do you set the stereo location of the phaser sound?

Set the stereo location of the phaser sound using the Pan (Phaser Output Pan) parameter. L63 is far left, 0 is center, and R63 is far right.

How can you use Control Change 17 to modify the Feedback value of P-10: Stereo Flanger when Control Depth is set to +100?

  1. Turn Multi-Effects on for Part A01. F041104212404122015C F7
  2. Set the Multi-Effects type to P-10: Stereo Flanger (value: 01 H 23H) F041104212400300012319F7
  3. Set Feedback (address: 40H 03H 08H) to -98%. F041104212400308QQ35F7
  4. Set Control Source 2 (address: 40H 03H 1 DH) to CC17 (11H). FO 41 10 42 12 40 03 10 11 OF F7
  5. Set Control Depth 2 (address: 40H 03H 1EH) to +100% (7FH). FO 41 10 42 12 40 03 1 E 7F 20 F7

How does the Feedback parameter change?

The Feedback parameter changes in 2% steps, with 40H as the center.

How can you use Control Change 17 to modify the Feedback value of P-10: Stereo Flanger when the Control Depth is set to -100?

  1. Turn Multi-Effects on for Part A01. FO 41 10 42 12 40 41 22 01 5C F7
  2. Set the Multi-Effects type lo P-1 O: Stereo Flanger (value: 01 H 23H) FO 41 10 42 12 40 03 00 01 23 19 F7
  3. Set Feedback (address: 40H 03H 08H) to +98% (7FH). FO 4110 4212 40 0308 7F 36 F7
  4. Set Control Source 2 (address: 40H 03H 10H) to CC17 (11H). FO 41 10 42 12 40031011 OF F7
  5. Set Control Depth 2 (address: 40H 03H 1 EH) to -100% (OOH). FO 41 10 42 12 40 03 1 E QQ 1 F F7

How does the Feedback parameter change when Effect Control Depth is set to -100%?

The Feedback parameter changes in 2% steps, with 40H as the center. Since Effect Control Depth is set to -100%, increasing control change values will cause the value of the Feedback parameter to decrease.

How do you use the System mode?

System mode can be accessed from any mode. Use the following procedure to set System mode parameters:

  1. Press [SYSTEM] to make the indicator light.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ▲ ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the page in which you wish to edit.
  4. Use CURSOR [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to select the para- meter that you wish to modify.
  5. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.

How do you leave system mode?

To leave the system mode, press [EXIT] or {SYSTEM].

What menu names are in System mode?

System mode contains pages with the following menu names:

  • Setup
  • Effect Switch
  • MIDI
  • Sound
  • Lock
  • Preview
  • Display

When are parameter values not in effect?

Parameter values which will not take effect until the next time the power is turned on are displayed in parentheses ( ).

What parameters related to the power-on state can you set in the “Setup” page?

  • LCD Contrast
  • Power Up Mode

How do you adjust the display contrast?

Depending on the angle at which the SC-880 is placed, the display can sometimes be difficult to read. If so, adjust the contrast of the display. Higher values will make the characters darker.

What are the Power Up Mode options?

Last-Set/Default

What happens if the Power Up Mode is set to Last-Set?

The settings that were in effect when the power was last turned off will be remembered, and the previous screen condition will be reproduced when the power is turned on again.

What happens if the Power Up Mode is set to Default?

The state at power-off will not be remembered, and the SC-880 will always be in Patch mode when the power is turned on.

What do the “Effect Switch” parameters let you do?

The various “Effect Switch” parameters let you turn the effects (reverb, chorus, delay, multi-effect) on/off.

When might you want to turn the Effect Switch settings off?

You may wish to turn these settings off when you are listening to the original sound as you edit, or when you are using external effect devices instead of the built-in effects.

What parameters for switching effects on/off does the “Effect Switch” page contain?

  • Multi-FX
  • Reverb
  • Chorus
  • Delay
  • EQ

What happens when “Multi-FX” is On?

The multi-effect will be applied to each part as specified by the multi-effect On/Off setting that was made for each part.

What happens when “Multi-FX” is Off?

The multi-effect will be Off for all parts, regardless of the multi-effect On/Off setting that was made for each part.

What happens when “Reverb” is On?

Reverb will be applied according to the value that was specified for each part.

What happens when “Reverb” is Off?

Reverb for all parts will be Off.

What happens when “Chorus” is On?

Chorus will be applied according to the value that was specified for each part.

What happens when “Chorus” is Off?

Chorus for all parts will be Off.

What happens when “Delay” is On?

Delay will be applied according to the value that was specified for each part.

What happens when “Delay” is Off?

Delay for all parts will be Off.

What happens when “EQ” is On?

The equalizer will be applied to each part as specified by the On/Off setting that was made for each part.

What happens when “EQ” is Off?

The equalizer will be Off for all parts, regardless of the setting that was made for each part.

What parameters determine how incoming MIDI messages are routed to the Parts?

The SC-880 provides various parameters that determine how incoming MIDI messages are routed to the Parts. For some types of MIDI message, a switch is provided to turn recep­tion on or off.

What are the eight parameters in the “MIDI” page that you can set?

  • MIDI OUT/THRU
  • Input Mode
  • Rx Module Mode
  • Device ID Number
  • Rx GM On
  • Rx GS Reset
  • Control Channel
  • Bulk Mode

What does the MIDI OUT/THRU connector on the rear panel of the SC-880 function as?

The MIDI OUT /THRU connector on the rear panel of the SC-880 can function either as a MIDI OUT or a MIDI THRU.

How does the connector function when the MIDI OUT/THRU is set to OUT?

The connector will function as MIDI OUT.

How does the connector function when set to THRU?

It will function as MIDI THRU.

What happens if THRU is selected?

Data received at MIDI IN A will be re­transmitted from the MIDI OUT/THRU connector. Data received at MIDI IN B will never be “thru-ed”, regardless of the THRU setting, and regardless of the setting for Input Mode.

What happens if OUT is selected?

Exclusive data or data received at the computer connector can be transmitted from the MIDI OUT /THRU connector.

Where are MIDI messages received at MIDI IN A passed to with the factory settings?

With the factory settings, MIDI messages received at MIDI IN A are passed to Part Group A Parts.

Where are MIDI messages received at MIDI IN B passed to with the factory settings?

MIDI messages received at MIDI IN B are passed to Part Group B.

When is there no need to change the standard setting?

In normal circumstances, there is no need to change the standard set­ting.

How can you change the MIDI signal?

  • Standard
  • X-connect (Cross connect)
  • Merge-+ A
  • Merge-+ B
  • A only

How does the Standard setting work?

MIDI messages received at MIDI IN A are passed to Part Group A, and MIDI messages received at MIDI IN B are passed to Part Group B. Standard is the factory setting.

How does the X-connect (Cross connect) setting work?

This reverses the handling of Standard. MIDI messages received at MIDI IN A are passed to Part Group B, and MIDI messages received at MIDI IN B are passed to Part Group A.

How does the Merge-+ A setting work?

MIDI messages received at either MIDI IN A or MIDI IN B are sent to Part Group A. MIDI messages are not sent to Part Group B, so they will not sound.

When might you use the Merge-+A setting?

For example, you might use this setting when you wish to play Part Group A simultaneously from a MIDI keyboard and from a MIDI sequencer.

How does the Merge-+ B setting work?

This reverses the handling of Merge -+ A. MIDI messages received at either MIDI IN A or MIDI IN B are sent to Part Group B. MIDI messages are not sent to Part Group A, so they will not sound.

How does the A only setting work?

When using the Roland Super MPU (MIDI Processing Unit: two MIDI OUTs), some software will transmit the same data to both of the SC-880’s MIDI IN connectors. This will cause two Parts to sound in unison, causing an unnatural effect. In such cases, do not use both MIDI INs. Either disconnect one of the MIDI cables, or use the preceding procedure to set it to A only. When at A only, data received at MIDI IN B will be ignored.

What happens to MIDI data received at MIDI IN A if the computer switch on the rear panel of the SC- 880 is set to either PC-1, PC-2, or Mac?

MIDI data received at MIDI IN A will not be sent to the Parts (the sound generator), but will be sent through the computer connector to the computer.

How is data sent from the computer through the computer connector treated?

The data sent from the computer through the computer connector will be treated as received from MIDI IN A, and will be passed to the various Parts according to the Input Mode setting.

What are the Rx Module Mode settings?

On/Off

What does the Rx Module Mode setting determine?

The Rx Module Mode setting is the receive switch for MIDI messages (System Mode Set p. 193) that select the System Mode.

What happens if Rx Module Mode is turned Off?

The mode will not change even if System Mode Set messages are received.

What happens if Rx Module Mode is turned On?

The mode will change.

What is the Device ID Number range?

1-17-32

What is the Device ID number?

The Device ID number is an identification number used when transmitting and receiving exclusive messages.

When does the SC-880 receive exclusive messages?

The SC-880 receives exclusive messages only if its own device ID number matches the device ID number of the mes­sage.

What should you do if you wish to transmit exclusive mes­sages between devices?

You must make sure that their device ID numbers match.

What is the Device ID number range?

The device ID number is a number from 1-32.

What is the factory setting for the Device ID number?

With the fac­tory settings, the number is 17.

What should you do if you wish to play back Roland SMF music data?

Be sure that the device ID number is set to 17. If it is not, playback will not be correct.

Can you specify the device ID number separately for individual Parts?

It is not possible to specify the device ID number separately for individual Parts.

What are the Rx GM On settings?

On/Off

What are the Rx GS Reset settings?

On/Off

What are General MIDI System On and GS Reset?

General MIDI System On and GS Reset are MIDI exclusive messages that are included in the beginning of song data bearing the General MIDI or GS logo.

What do General MIDI System On and GS Reset messages do when song data is played back from the beginning?

These messages cause the sound generator parameters to be reset to basic values so that playback will be correct.

What should you do to the parameters when playing back song data bearing the General MIDI or GS logo?

You should leave these parameters on.

What happens if these parameters are turned off?

General MIDI System On and GS Reset messages will be ignored.

What are the Control Channel settings?

Off/A01-A16/B01-B16

What happens when a MIDI program change message is received?

Normally, when a MIDI program change message is received, the tone of a part will change.

What happens if you specify the control channel?

Program changes can select patches and performances.

What happens if the Control Channel is turned “Off”?

Incoming program change messages will switch the tone of a part.

What is the factory setting for Control Channel?

With the factory settings, Con/ml Channel is set to Off

What happens when you switch the Module Mode?

Control Channel will be turned “Off”.

What happens when “GM System On” or “GS Reset” are received?

The Control Channel will be “OFF.”

What are the Bulk Mode settings?

Original/GS Compatible

When should you use a Bulk Dump?

When you wish to save SC-880 settings on another device, use a Bulk Dump.

What does a Bulk Dump consist of?

A bulk dump consists of system exclusive messages, and each system exclusive message contains a model ID that is unique to each device.

Can System exclusive messages be exchanged between devices with differing model ID numbers?

System exclusive messages cannot be exchanged between devices with differing model ID numbers.

What two model IDs does the SC-880 have?

  • The “MODEL ID=42H” that is common to all GS devices
  • The SC-880’s own “MODEL ID=45H.”

What happens when “Bulk Mode” is set to “Original”?

The portions of the bulk dump that are common to all GS devices will be trans­mitted with ID number “42H,” and the portions that were added on the SC-880 will be transmitted with the SC-880’s own ID number “45H.”

What setting should you use for Bulk Mode for normal use?

You should set this to “Original.”

When should you use the “GS Compatible” setting?

When “Bulk Mode” is set to “GS Compatible,” the entire bulk dump will be transmitted with model ID “42H.”

What limitations are there with a Bulk Mode setting of “GS Compatible”?

With a setting of “GS Compatible,” there will be limitations on the content that can be transmitted by “Bulk Dump.”

When should you use the “GS Compatible” setting?

Use the “GS Compatible” setting when you are creating song data intended for playback on GS instruments, or when creating song data for playback on an SC-88/88 Pro.

How many pages does “Sound” occupy?

“Sound” occupies two pages.

What five parameters are there?

  • Tone Set Range
  • Part Monitor
  • Backing Level
  • System OUT Mode
  • Patch Load Mode

What are the Tone Set Range settings?

1-3

What happens when you switch the Tone Set Range?

Switching Tone Set Range here will limit the Tone Sets which can be selected.

What happens if you select Tone Set Range: 1?

Only Tone Set: 1 can be selected for the tone selection of each part.

What happens if you select Tone Set Range: 2?

Either Tone Set: 1 or Tone Set: 2 (not both) can be selected for the tone selection of each part.

What happens if you select Tone Set Range: 3?

All tone sets will be available for selection.

What is the normal setting for Tone Set Range?

Normally you will set this to Tone Set Range 3.

When is it convenient to set Tone Set Range to 1 or 2?

This is convenient when you wish to listen to a song that was created on the SC-55/55Mk2 or SC-88, or when you wish to create a song for playback on the SC-55/55Mk2 or SC-88.

What Tone Sets are available for each Tone Set Range?

  • Tone Set Range 1: The same sounds as the SC-55/55Mk2.
  • Tone Set Range 2: The same sounds as the SC-88.
  • Tone Set Range 3: The original tune set of the SC-880.

What are the Part Monitor settings?

On/Off

When can you turn on Part Monitor?

Part Monitor can be turned on when you want to listen to only one or more Parts that you select.

What does the Part Monitor allow you to do?

This feature conve­niently allows you to listen to only the instruments you want to hear during sequenced playback.

What happens when Part Monitor is turned on?

You can hear only the part that is shown in the upper left of the display.

What can you do with the Part Monitor turned on?

You can press [INFO] to increase the number of parts being monitored. Use PART [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to select a part, and use the VALUE dial to turn it on/ off.

What are the Backing Level settings?

0%-99%

What can you do with the Part Monitor turned on?

You can raise the Backing Level value to hear the sound of other parts as well.

What happens when the Backing Level value is 0?

Only the parts for which the Part Monitor is on will be heard.

What are the System OUT Mode settings?

SelecVFixed

What does System OUT Mode determine?

This determines whether the OUT Assign (Output Assign) setting will be valid or not.

What happens when System OUT Mode is set to Select?

The sound of each Part will be output as speci­fied by the OUT Asgn settings.

What happens when System OUT Mode is set to Fixed?

The output of each Part will be fixed as follows, regardless of the OUT Asgn settings. For Single Module Mode:

  • Both Part Group A and B will be output in stereo with the effect sound from the Output 1 jacks. For Double Module Mode:
  • The Part Group A will be output in stereo with the effect sound from the Output 1 jacks, and the Part Group B similarly from the Output 2 jacks.
  • In this case only, the Output 2 jacks will output sound that includes the effect sound.

What sound will the headphone jack output?

The headphone jack will output the sound that is sent to Output 1.

What does this mean for the sound of Parts assigned to Output 2?

The sound of the Parts assigned to Output 2 will not be heard in the headphones.

What is the factory setting for System OUT Mode?

At the factory settings, this parameter is set to Select.

What are the Patch Load Mode settings?

lniVKeep

What does Patch Load Mode specify?

Specify how each mode will operate when selecting patches.

What happens when Patch Load Mode is set to Init?

  • When a preset patch (P-001-P-128) is selected, the settings of Parts A03-B16 will be initialized.
  • When a user patch (U-001-U-128) is selected, the settings of Parts A07-B16 will be initialized.

What happens when Patch Load Mode is set to Keep?

  • When a preset patch (P-001-P-128) is selected, the settings of Parts A03-B16 will not be initialized, but will maintain the settings that were in effect before the patch was selected.
  • When a user patch (U-001-U-128) is selected, the settings of Parts A07-Bl6 will not be initialized, but will maintain the settings that were in effect before the patch was selected. When a user patch is selected, any part A01-A06 whose Receive Channel is set to “A–” or “B–” will not be initialized, but will maintain the settings that were in effect before the patch was selected.

What is the factory setting for Patch Load Mode?

The factory setting is Init.

What happens to the settings of Part group B in Double Module Mode?

The settings of Part group B will not be initialized.

What parameters in the “Lock” page can you set to prevent settings from being initialized?

  • Output Assign Lock
  • Mute Lock
  • Equalizer Lock

What are the Output Assign Lock settings?

On/Off

When will the setting of OUT Assign (Output Assign) return to the factory settings?

The setting of OUT Assign (Output Assign) will return to the factory settings when GS Reset or General MIDI System On are received.

What happens if Assign Lock is turned On?

These settings will not change.

What are the Mute Lock settings?

On/Off

When are Part Mute settings sometimes defeated?

When you once again play back a song that was previously played back, Part Mute settings are sometimes defeated.

Why are Part Mute settings sometimes defeated?

This is because the beginning of the song data contains a message that causes the SC-880 to reset to initial values (General MIDI System On/GS Reset).

What happens if Mute Lock is turned on?

Muting will not be turned off even when GS Reset or General MIDI System On is received, so there will be no need for you to remake mute settings.

When is it convenient to use Mute Lock?

This is convenient when, for example, you are repeatedly playing back a song with a certain Part muted so that you can play that Part yourself.

What are the Equalizer Lock settings?

On/Off

What happens to the equalizer settings when a GS Reset or General MIDI System On message is received?

The equalizer settings will be restored to the factory settings (initialized).

What happens if Equalizer Lock is turned on?

This will not occur.

What happens when you press the VOLUME knob?

The tone of the part shown in the upper left of the display will sound.

What parameters specify how notes will be sounded when you press the VOLUME knob?

  • Mode
  • Key
  • Velo

What are the Mode settings?

Phrase/Chord/Single

What does the Mode setting specify?

Specifies how notes will be sounded when you press the VOLUME knob.

What happens when Mode is set to Phrase?

A phrase suitable for the tone will be played.

What happens when Mode is set to Chord?

The notes specified by Note 1-4 will sound simultaneously.

What happens when Mode is set to Single?

The notes specified by Note 1-4 will sound suc­cessively each time you press the VOLUME knob.

What do Key 1-4 settings specify?

C-1-G9 Specifies the names of the notes that will sound when the “Mode” setting is Chord or Single.

What happens when the “Mode” setting is Single?

The notes specified by Key 1-4 will sound cyclically, each time you press the VOLUME knob.

What happens when the “Mode” setting is Chord?

The notes specified for Key 1-4 will sound as a chord.

What note is A4?

The A note in the center of the keyboard is A4.

What happens if you have set Key Shift?

The pitch will be shifted.

What do Velo 1-4 settings specify?

0-127 Specifies the velocity value of the notes that will be sounded when the “Mode” setting is Chord or Single.

What happens when you increase the velocity values?

Normally, increasing the velocity values will increase the volume.

What happens if Velo is set to 0?

There will be no sound.

What two display-related parameters can you set in “Display”?

  • Display
  • Peak Hold

What are the Display settings?

Type 1-Type 4

What does the Display parameter allow you to do?

This parameter allows you to select one of the following 4 types of volume level display.

  • Type1
  • Type2
  • Type3
  • Type4

What are the Peak Hold settings?

Off/Type 1-Type 3

What happens in the SC-880 display?

In the SC-880 display, the highest dot in the bar level display will be held on for a short time after the volume falls below it.

What can you select with the Peak Hold function?

You can select one of the following four ways in which this Peak Hold function will work.

  • Off: The peak level will not be held.
  • Type 1: After holding the peak level, the peak level dot will move downward.
  • Type 2: After holding the peak level, the peak level dot will disappear.
  • Type 3: After holding the peak level, the peak level dot will move upward.

What convenient functions are contained within Utility mode?

Utility mode contains various convenient functions.

What can you do in Utility mode?

You can transmit SC-880 settings to another MIDI device for saving, restore the settings of the SC-880 to the factory-set condition, or copy/delete/exchange part settings.

Can Utility mode be accessed from any mode?

Utility mode can be accessed from any mode.

What pages are in Utility mode?

  • Bulk Dump
  • Module Mode
  • Initialize
  • Part Transfer
  • Factory Preset

How can the SC-880 transmit the contents of its sound genera­tor’s memory as MIDI data?

The SC-880 can transmit the contents of its sound genera­tor’s memory as MIDI data.

What are the two ways data can be transmitted?

  • Bulk Dump, which transmits multiple parameters as a group
  • Individual Data, which allows parameters to be transmitted individually

How is all data transmitted?

All data is transmitted as System Exclusive messages.

When should you use Bulk Dump?

Use Bulk Dump when you wish to save the settings of this unit on a sequencer or personal computer.

What can you do by transmitting a Bulk Dump?

You can also set all parameters of two units to identical settings.

What can you do by transmitting Individual Data?

You can create data without having to look up individual System Exclusive messages, letting you create data more efficiently.

How can you save the SC-880’s settings on the sequencer?

Here we will explain how you can connect the SC-880 to a sequencer and save the SC-880’s settings on the sequencer.

How do you transmit a Bulk Dump?

  1. Set the MIDI OUT/THRU select switch to OUT.
  2. Use a MIDI cable to connect the SC-880 MIDI OUT/THRU connector to the sequencer’s MIDI IN con­nector.
  3. Press [UTILITY] to make the indicator light.
  4. Use CURSOR [ ▲ ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  5. Select “Bulk Dump,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  6. Use CURSOR [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to select the data that will be transmitted.
  7. Press [ENTER].
  8. Use CURSOR [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to move the cursor to the transmit start number.
  9. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.
  10. Use CURSOR [ ◄ ] [ ► ] to move the cursor to the transmit end number.
  11. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the value.
  12. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked for confirmation. To halt the bulk dump, press [EXIT].
  13. Start recording on the sequencer.
  14. Press [ENTER], and data transmission will begin. While the SC-880 transmits data, the display will indicate “Transmitting.” To halt transmission, press [EXIT]. When transmission ends, the “Transmitting” display will disappear.
  15. When the SC-880 finishes transmitting the data, stop recording on the sequencer.

What are the Bulk Dump options that can be transmitted?

  • All: all parameters of the SC-880 (Including User parameters)
  • Performance: Creating your own User Performance
  • Patch: Creating your own User Patch
  • Rhythm: Creating your own User Rhythm Set
  • User Tone: Creating your own User Tone
  • Multi-FX: Creating your own User Multi-Effects
  • All-User: all parameters except User Parameter (User tone, User Rhythm Set, User Effect, User Performance and User Patch) set­tings.
  • GS-A: GS parameters for Part group A
  • GS-8: GS parameters for Part group B

What should you do if you have selected “All,” “All-User,” “GS-A” or “GS-B”?

Skip steps 8-11 and continue from step 12.

What determines the contents that will be transmitted?

The contents that will be transmitted will depend on the “Bulk Mode” setting.

What should you do if you are creating song data for the SC-88 Pro, or if you will be using SC-880 settings on the SC-88 Pro?

Set “Bulk Mode” to Compatible.

What should you ensure the receiving MIDI device has?

Since this operation transmits a large amount of data, make sure that the receiving MIDI device has sufficient memory.

What happens if the receiving device has insufficient memory?

Recording will not be completed.

What are the data sizes of the bulk dumps transmitted by the SC-880?

  • All: approximately 360K (approximately 3 minutes are required for transmission)
  • Performance: approximately 70K
  • Patch: approximately 230K
  • Rhythm: approximately 30K
  • User Tone: approximately 4K
  • Multi-FX: approximately 3K
  • All-User: approximately 20K
  • GS-A: approximately 10K
  • GS-B: approximately 10K

What do the data amounts for “Performance,” “Patch,” “Rhythm,” “User Tone” and “Multi-FX” data represent?

Data amounts are for when all data is transmitted.

What can the model ID numbers included in the bulk data trans­mitted by the SC-880 be specified by?

The model ID numbers included in the bulk data trans­mitted by the SC-880 can be specified by the “Bulk Mode” setting.

What happens when “Bulk Mode” is set to Compatible and “Bulk Dump” is set to “All,”“Performance,” “Patch” or “Rhythm”?

Setting “Bulk Dump” to “All,”“Performance,” “Patch” or “Rhythm” will restrict the transmitted contents.

What are the restrictions for each Bulk Dump option?

  • All: Only parts A01 and A02 of user patches will be transmitted. Only user patches U-001-U-016 will be transmitted. User performance settings will not be transmitted.
  • Patch: Only parts A01 and A02 of user patches will be transmitted. Only user patches U-001-U-016 will be transmitted. User performance settings will not be transmitted.
  • Performance: User performance settings will not be transmitted.
  • Rhythm: Only user rhythm settings U01 and U02 will be transmitted.

What happens when Bulk Dump transmission is execut­ed?

The following display will appear.

How can I transmit data for an individual parameter?

  1. Move the cursor to the parameter for which you wish to transmit individual data.
  2. Start recording on the sequencer.
  3. Press [ENTER].
  4. Use CURSOR [ ◄] [► ] to select “GS” or “GM.”

What happens if MIDI OUT/THRU is set to THRU?

The data will not be transmitted.

Is it possible to transfer data to a computer without using the MIDI connectors?

Yes, it is also possible to transfer data to a computer via the computer connector.

How many system modes does the SC-880 have?

The SC-880 has two system modes:

  • Single Module Mode (Single)
  • Double Module Mode (Double)

What is the advantage of using Double Module Mode?

When Double Module Mode is selected, two types of system effect can be used simultaneously. For example, you could use different types of reverb on Rhythm Parts than on Normal Parts. Other parameters can also be set separately in two groups.

Can multi-effects be used for both Part Group A and Part Group B?

No, multi-effects can be used only for Part Group A.

How do I set the Module Mode?

  1. Press [UTILITY] to make the indicator light.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Module Mode,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR [ A ] I ’ ] I ◄] I ►] to select “Single” or “Double.”
    • Single: The Module Mode is set to single module mode.
    • Double: The Module Mode is set to double module mode.
  5. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked for confirmation. To cancel the setting, press [EXIT].
  6. Press [ENTER].

What happens after the SC-880 switches to the selected module mode?

When Double Module Mode is selected, some pages will show an A or B at the right of the menu name. This indicates whether you are setting the parameters of part group A or B. Pages in which A or B is displayed contain two sets of parameters, for part groups A and B respectively.

Is the selection of Single Module Mode or Double Module Mode remembered when the power is turned off?

Yes, the selection is remembered when the power is turned off. The system mode will not change even if the power is turned off and then on again.

What happens if you change the operating module mode?

Be aware that if you change the operating module mode, the settings of each Part will be initialized (GS Reset).

In both Single Module Mode and Double Module Mode, where are MIDI messages received at MIDI IN A sent?

In both Single Module Mode and Double Module Mode, MIDI messages received at MIDI IN A are sent to Part Group A, and MIDI messages received at MIDI IN B are sent to Part Group B. Be aware that the route by which data is passed between the two MIDI IN connectors and each Part is determined by the System parameter Input Mode. It is possible to specify the address for Exclusive messages so that an Exclusive message received at MIDI A will be passed to Part Group B.

Which parameters have two groups provided in Double Module Mode?

  • Patch Name
  • Performance Name
  • Master Control
  • Level
  • Pan
  • Master Tune
  • Key Shift
  • Reverb
    • Type
    • Level
    • Character
    • Pre-LPF
    • Time
    • Delay Feedback
  • Chorus
    • Type
    • Level
    • Feedback
    • Pre-LPF
    • Delay
    • Rate
    • Depth
    • Send to Reverb
  • Effect Switch
    • Reverb
    • Chorus
  • MIDI
  • Device ID Number
  • Rx GM On
  • Rx GS
  • Lock Mute Lock

When do I need to initialize this unit for General MIDI/GS settings?

When you wish to play back song data carrying the General MIDI/GS logo, you need to initialize this unit for General MIDI/GS settings. When this is done, this unit will be set to the basic General MIDI/GS settings appropriate for playing back song data carrying the General MIDI/GS logo.

If I’m playing back song data from the beginning, do I need to initialize it?

No. The beginning of song data carrying the General MIDI/GS logo contains data which requests the sound generator to initialize itself (General MIDI System On, GS Reset). This means that if you are playing back the song data from the beginning, initialization will be done automatically, and there is no need for you to do it using the front panel buttons.

How do I initialize the unit for General MIDI/GS settings?

  1. Press [UTILITY] to make the indicator light.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Initialize,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR [ ! ] [ ’ ] [ ◄ J I ► J to select “GS” or “GM.”
  5. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked for confirmation. To cancel initialization, press [EXIT].
  6. Press [ENTER]. Initialization will be executed.

Which System mode parameters will be initialized when you initialize for General MIDI/GS?

  • Multi-FX
  • Reverb
  • Chorus
  • Delay
  • Control Channel

When do I need to select the sound map of the Roland CM-64?

The SC-880 allows you to select the sound map of the Roland CM-64 (multitimbral sound module). When you wish to play back song data that was created for the CM-64, use the following procedure.

How do I select the sound map of the Roland CM-64?

  1. Press [UTILITY] to make the indicator light.
  2. Use CURSOR [ A ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Initialize,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR [ ◄] [ ►] to move the cursor to “CM-64.”
  5. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked for confirmation. To cancel initialization, press [EXIT].
  6. Press [ENTER]. The CM-64 sound map will be selected.

What happens when I select the CM-64 sound map?

Be aware that when you select the CM-64 sound map, all previous settings will be lost. When you select the CM-64 sound map, the settings of each part will be as follows for both part groups A and B:

Part Name Rx.Channel Tone (VARIATION/TONE No.) LEVEL PAN REVERB CHORUS KEY SHIFT
Acou Piano 1 1 (127/001) 100 0 64 0 0
Slap Bass 1 2 1 (127/069) 100 L10 64 0 0
Str Sect 1 3 1 (127/049) 100 L10 64 0 0
Brs Sect 1 4 1 (127/096) 100 L10 64 6 0
Sax 1 5 1 (127/079) 100 L10 64 6 0
Ice Rain 6 1 (127/042) 100 L46 64 0 0
Elec Piano 1 7 1 (127/004) 100 R27 64 0 0
Bottleblow 8 1 (127/111) 100 L63 64 0 0
Orche Hit 9 1 (127/123) 100 R63 64 10 0
CM-64/32L Set 10 1 (128) 100 0 64 10 0
FRETLESS 1 11 1 (126/028) 100 0 64 0 0
CHOIR1 12 1 (126/030) 100 R17 64 0 0
A.PIANO1 13 1 (126/001) 100 0 64 0 0
E.ORGAN2 14 1 (126/038) 100 R35 64 0 0
E.GUITAR 1 15 1 (126/014) 100 L37 64 0 0
SOFTTP 1 16 1 (126/047) 100 L19 64 0 0
  • Bnd Range: +12, Mod LFO Pelz: +4
  • The names of these sounds are identical to the names on the CM-64, so they differ from what they are called on this unit.

What are the settings for all Parts when you select the CM-64 sound map?

  • LEVEL: 127
  • PAN: 0
  • CHORUS: 64
  • KEY SHIFT: ±0

What are the main differences between the CM-64 and the SC-880?

When the CM-64 sound map is selected, the playback result will be the same as if a CM-64 were used. However, since the internal structure of the sound generator is different, the result is not absolutely identical. Please be aware of the following main differences:

  1. How the sounds change When velocity, modulation, and aftertouch, etc., are used to add expression, the sounds will change in a way slightly different than the CM-64.
  2. Exclusive data The SC-880 is not compatible with Exclusive data from the CM-64. If the CM-64’s Exclusive data is received, this unit’s settings will not change. This means that if the song data contains CM-64 sound data (Exclusive data), playing back that song data will not have the same result as it would have on the CM-64.
  3. Pan The SC-880’s pan settings are opposite to those of the CM-64. Please reverse the left/right (L/R) connections of the audio output jacks.

What are the three part-related functions that allow you to copy, delete, or exchange part settings?

In the “PART TRANSFER” page, the following three parameters allow you to copy, delete, or exchange part settings.

  • Copy
  • Clear
  • Exchange

What happens when a rhythm part is copied to a different part group?

When a rhythm part is copied to a different part group, the copy source settings will be reflected in the rhythm set settings of the same rhythm part of the copy destination.

How can I copy settings to another part?

You can copy the settings of a part to another part.

  1. Press [UTILITY] to make the indicator light.
  2. Use CURSOR [ A ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Part Transfer,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR ( ◄] [ ► ] to move the cursor to “Copy.”
  5. Press [ENTER].
  6. Use CURSOR ( ◄ ] ( ► ] to move the cursor to the copy source.
  7. Rotate the VALUE dial to specify the copy source part.
  8. Use CURSOR ( ◄] [ ►] to move the cursor to the copy destination.
  9. Rotate the VALUE dial to specify the copy destination part.
  10. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked for confirmation. To cancel, press [EXIT).
  11. Press [ENTER]. The settings will be copied. The copy source and copy destination will have the same settings.

How can I delete settings?

You can delete the settings of the selected part to initialize them.

  1. Press [UTILITY] to make the indicator light.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Part Transfer,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR ( ◄] ( ► ] to move the cursor to “Clear.”
  5. Press [ENTER].
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the part whose settings you wish to delete.
  7. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked for confirmation. To cancel, press [EXIT].
  8. Press [ENTER]. The settings will be deleted.

What happens to the settings of a deleted part?

The settings of the deleted part will be initialized.

How can I exchange settings with another part?

Settings of the selected part can be exchanged with another part.

  1. Press [UTILITY] to make the indicator light.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Part Transfer,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR [ ◄) [ ►] to move the cursor to “Exchange.”
  5. Press [ENTER].
  6. Use CURSOR [ ◄] [ ►] to move the cursor to the exchange source part.
  7. Rotate the VALUE dial to specify the exchange source part.
  8. Use CURSOR [ ◄] [► ] to move the cursor to the exchange destination part.
  9. Rotate the VALUE dial to specify the exchange destination part.
  10. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked for confirmation. To cancel, press [EXIT].
  11. Press [ENTER]. The settings will be exchanged.

Where can I restore all settings of the SC-880 to their factory-set condition or return the contents of user patches to their factory-set condition?

In the “Factory Preset” page, you can restore all settings of the SC-880 to their factory-set condition, or return the contents of user patches to their factory-set condition.

How do I return all data to the factory settings?

Restore all settings of the SC-880 to their factory-set values.

  1. Press [UTILITY] to make the indicator light.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Factory Preset,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Press CURSOR [ T ) to move the cursor to “All.”
  5. Press [ENTER). You will be asked for confirmation. To cancel, press [EXIT].
  6. Press [ENTER]. Restore all settings of the SC-880 to their factory-set values.

What happens to the contents saved in User memory when you execute Factory Preset?

Be aware that when you execute Factory Preset, the entire contents that was saved in User memory will be lost.

Can I cancel the Factory Preset operation once it has begun?

No. To cancel the procedure without executing, press [EXIT]. Once the Factory Preset operation has begun, it is not possible to cancel.

What happens to the screen display values of parameters when you execute the Factory Preset operation?

When you execute the Factory Preset operation, the screen display values of the following parameters will return to their factory-set values, but the actual settings will not have been initialized. You must turn the power off and on again for initialization to take effect for these parameters.

  • MIDI OUT/THAU
  • Input Mode

When will the factory settings that had been stored in a user patch be lost?

When a patch that you create is saved as a user patch, the factory settings that had been stored in that user patch will be lost.

How do I return a user patch to the factory settings?

In the “Factory Preset” page you can return any desired user patch to its factory settings.

  1. Press [UTILITY] to make the indicator light.
  2. Use CURSOR [ ! ] to move the cursor to the menu name.
  3. Select “Factory Preset,” by rotating the VALUE dial.
  4. Use CURSOR [ ! I [ T I [ ◄] [ ►] to move the cursor to “Patch.”
  5. Press [ENTER].
  6. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the user patch number which you wish to return to its factory settings.
  7. Press CURSOR [ ►] to move the cursor to the user patch number whose settings you wish to save.
  8. Rotate the VALUE dial to select the user patch number in which you wish to save the factory-set user patch settings.
  9. Press [ENTER]. You will be asked whether or not you wish to save. If you decide not to save, press [EXIT].
  10. Press [ENTER] to save the factory settings.

What does MIDI stand for?

MIDI stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface.”

What can MIDI devices transmit?

MIDI devices can transmit musically related data, such as performance data or data to select sounds.

Why is it beneficial that MIDI is a worldwide standard?

Since MIDI is a worldwide standard, musical data can be sent and received between devices even if they are of different types and were made by different manufacturers.

How is information describing events in a musical performance transmitted in the MIDI standard?

In the MIDI standard, information describing events in a musical performance, such as “a note was played” or “the pedal was depressed,” is transmitted as MIDI messages.

Is it necessary to know about MIDI if I’m simply playing commercially available music data or providing sound for game software?

No. As long as you are using the SC-880 to simply play commercially available music data or to provide sound for game software, it is not necessary to know about MIDI. Simply follow the instructions in the manual for your music data playback device (MIDI player), or your software.

What is a “MIDI Implementation Chart”?

The MIDI specification requires that the owner’s manual for each MIDI device include a “MIDI Implementation Chart” that shows the types of MIDI message which are actually transmitted and received by a device.

How can I use the MIDI Implementation Chart to determine which messages can be conveyed successfully?

Place the transmit column of the transmitting device’s implementation chart side by side with the receive column of the receiving device’s implementation chart. Messages which are marked as “O” in both charts can be conveyed successfully. If either chart shows a “X” for a certain type of message, that message cannot be conveyed.

How are MIDI messages transmitted and received?

MIDI messages are transmitted and received using three types of connectors. Connect MIDI cables to these connectors as appropriate for your setup.

  • MIDI IN: This connector receives messages from another MIDI device.
  • MIDI OUT: This connector transmits messages from the SC-880.
  • MIDI THRU: This connector re-transmits the messages received at MIDI IN.

What is the practical limit for connecting MIDI devices using MIDI THRU?

It is possible to use MIDI THRU to connect two or more MIDI devices, but in practice the limit is 5 units. This is because as the signal path becomes longer, the signal deteriorates and the messages can no longer be received correctly.

What determines the function of the MIDI THRU connector on the SC-880?

On the SC-880, MIDI THRU and MIDI OUT share the same connector. The MIDI OUT/THRU determines which function the connector will have.

How does MIDI transmit a wide variety of performance data over a single MIDI cable?

MIDI transmits a wide variety of performance data over a single MIDI cable. This is made possible by MIDI channels. MIDI channels allow specific data to be selected out of a large amount of data.

How many channels does MIDI provide?

MIDI provides sixteen channels, numbered 1-16.

When is music data received?

Music data is received when the transmit channel of the transmitting device matches the receive channel of the receiving device.

What are multitimbral sound modules?

Sound modules such as the SC-880, which are able to simultaneously play many parts, are called multitimbral sound modules. “Timbre” refers to the quality of a tone that distinguishes it from others.

How many types of Parts does the SC-880 have and what are they used for?

The SC-880 has two types of Parts:

  • Normal Parts: Used to play melody or bass lines.
  • Rhythm Parts: On General MIDI/GS sound generators, the Rhythm Part uses channel 10.

How many channels can the SC-880 receive simultaneously?

Since the SC-880 has two MIDI IN connectors, it can receive a total of 32 channels simultaneously. By using 32 channels you can play ensembles of 32 Parts.

What are the main types of MIDI messages received by the SC-880?

  • Note Messages: These messages convey notes played on the keyboard. They include the following information.
    • Note number: a number indicating the note (key) that was pressed or released
    • Note on: data indicating that the note (key) was pressed
    • Note off: data indicating that the note (key) was released
    • Velocity: a number indicating how strongly the note (key) was pressed
  • Pitch Bend: This message conveys the position of the bender lever (or pitch bend wheel). The pitch will change when this message is received.
  • Bank Select (Control Change number 0 and 32): These messages are used to select sounds.
  • Program Change: Sounds are selected by Program numbers 1-128. On the SC-880, these messages will select sounds (tones). By using Bank Select messages (which are a type of Control Change message), an even wider variety of sounds can be selected. These messages can also be used to select Patches. However, if settings have been made to allow Patches to be selected, the program change message for each Part will be ignored.
  • Control Change: These messages control parameters such as modulation and pan. The function of the message is determined by its Control Change number.
    • Modulation (control change number 1): This message controls vibrato.
    • Volume (control change number 7): This message controls the volume of a Part. When this message is received the volume of a Part will change.
    • Expression (control change number 11): This message conveys volume changes. It can be used to add expression during a song.

What happens to the volume of a Part when a value of 0 is received for either Volume messages (control change 7) or Expression messages (control change 11)?

The volume of a Part will be affected both by Volume messages (control change 7) and by Expression messages (control change 11). If a value of O is received for either of these messages, the Part volume will be O and will not rise even if the other message is sent with a higher value.

How is it convenient to use Volume and Expression for separate purposes?

It is convenient to use Volume and Expression for separate purposes, as follows.

  • Volume: Adjust the volume balance between parts (Specify at the beginning of the song)
  • Expression: Modify the volume during the song (Use to create crescendo and decrescendo, etc.)

Why is it more convenient to use Volume messages only at the beginning of the song and use Expression messages to create volume changes during the song?

If volume changes during a song are created using only Volume messages, adjusting the volume balance between parts will require you to modify all volume data in the entire song, which is quite inconvenient. It is much more convenient to use Volume messages only at the beginning of the song and use Expression messages to create volume changes during the song. For example, if you set a Volume value of 100 for each part at the beginning of the song and use Expression messages to change the volume during the song, the balance between parts can be adjusted simply by modifying the Volume data values at the beginning of the song, and the changes during the song will remain as they are. This is convenient in cases when (for example) you want to make a slight adjustment in the balance of the piano and bass.

What does the Pan (control change number 10) message control?

This message controls the stereo position of a Part.

What does the Hold (1) (control change number 64) message convey?

This message conveys the up/down movements of the damper pedal, causing the currently sounding notes to be sustained.

What happens when a message of Hold On is received?

When a message of Hold On is received, notes will be sustained. In the case of decay-type instruments such as a piano, the sound will decay gradually until a Hold Off message is received. In the case of sustain-type instruments such as an organ, the sound will continue sustaining until a Hold Off message is received.

What does the Sostenuto (control change number 66) message convey?

The sostenuto pedal on a piano sustains only the notes which were already sounding at the moment the pedal was pressed. The Sostenuto message conveys the movement of this pedal. When Sostenuto On is received, only the notes which were already on at that moment will be sustained. In the case of decay-type instruments such as a piano, the sound will decay gradually until a Sostenuto Off message is received. In the case of sustain-type instruments such as an organ, the sound will continue sustaining until a Sostenuto Off message is received.

What does the Soft (control change number 67) message convey?

The soft pedal on a piano softens the tone during the time the pedal is pressed. The Soft message conveys the movement of this pedal. When Soft On is received, the cutoff frequency will be lowered, causing a softer sound. When Soft Off is received, the previous sound will return.

What does the Reverb Send Level (control change number 91) message do?

This message adds a reverb effect to the Part.

What does the Chorus Send Level (control change number 93) message do?

This message adds a chorus effect to the Part.

What does the Delay Send Level (control change number 94) message do?

This message adds a delay effect to the Part.

What is the Portamento effect?

Portamento is an effect that creates a smooth change in pitch between the previously played note and the newly played note. When a Portamento message is received, the portamento effect will be turned on or off. Portamento Time controls the speed of the pitch change. Portamento Control specifies the Source Note number (the previously played note).

What are the RPN (Registered Parameter Number) messages used for?

Since the function of the RPN (Registered Parameter Number) is defined in the MIDI specification, this message can be used between devices of different types. The RPN MSB and LSB messages specify the parameter which is to be modified, and then Data Entry messages can be used to modify the value of that parameter. RPN can be used to adjust Pitch Bend Sensitivity, Master Coarse Tune, and Master Fine Tune.

Will the values modified using RPN messages be initialized even if Program Change messages, etc., are received to select other sounds?

No, the values modified using RPN messages will not be initialized even if Program Change messages, etc., are received to select other sounds.

What are NRPN (Non-registered Parameter Number) messages used for?

NRPN (Non-registered Parameter Number) messages can be used to modify the values of sound parameters unique to a particular device, The NRPN MSB and LSB messages specify the parameter which is to be modified, and then Data Entry messages can be used to modify the value of that parameter. Since the GS format defines the function of several NRPN messages, GS compatible application programs can use NRPN messages to modify sound data parameters for Vibrato, Cutoff Frequency, Resonance, and Envelope values.

What happens to the values modified using NRPN messages when Program Change messages, etc., are received to select other sounds?

The values modified using NRPN messages will not be initialized even if Program Change messages, etc., are received to select other sounds.

Will the SC-880 ignore NRPN messages with the factory settings?

Yes, with the factory settings, the SC-880 will ignore NRPN messages. After a GS Reset message is received, NRPN messages will be received. You can also turn NRPN on either from the front panel or by using exclusive messages, so that NRPN messages will be received.

What is an Aftertouch message?

Aftertouch is a message which conveys the pressure applied to the keyboard after playing a note, so that this information can be used to control various aspects of the sound. There are two types of aftertouch message: Polyphonic Key Pressure which is transmitted separately for each note, and Channel Key Pressure which is transmitted as one value that affects all notes on the specified MIDI channel.

What do I need to do in order for Aftertouch messages to have an effect?

With the factory settings, Aftertouch messages will have no effect when received by the SC-880. In order for Aftertouch messages to do something, you need to set Aftertouch-related parameters.

What does the All Sounds Off message do?

This message completely turns off the sound of all currently sounding notes. The sound of the specified channel will be forcibly turned off.

What does the All Notes Off message do?

This message causes a Note Off to be sent to each note of the specified channel that is currently on. However, if Hold 1 or Sostenuto are on, the sound will continue until these are turned off.

What does the Reset All Controllers message do?

This message returns controller values to their initial settings. The following controller values for the specified channel will be reset to their initial values:

Controller Initial Value
Pitch Bend 0 (center)
Polyphonic Key Pressure 0 (minimum)
Channel Pressure 0 (minimum)
Modulation 0 (minimum)
Expression 127 (maximum)
Hold 0 (off)
Portamento 0 (off)
Soft 0 (off)
Sostenuto 0 (off)
RPN number unset
NRPN number unset

Will the parameter values that were modified using RPN or NRPN change when a Reset All Controllers message is received?

No, parameter values that were modified using RPN or NRPN will not change even when a Reset All Controllers message is received.

What is the Active Sensing message used for?

This message is used to check for broken MIDI connections, such as MIDI connectors that have been pulled out, or MIDI cables that have been damaged. The SC-880 transmits Active Sensing messages from MIDI OUT at specific intervals. Once an Active Sensing message is received at MIDI IN, Active Sensing monitoring will begin, and if an Active Sensing message fails to arrive for more than 420 milliseconds, it is assumed that the cable has been disconnected.

What happens if the Active Sensing message fails to arrive for more than 420 milliseconds?

If this happens, all currently sounding notes are turned off, the same procedures that would take place if a Reset All Controllers message were received are carried out, and Active Sensing monitoring stops.

What are Exclusive messages used for?

Exclusive messages are used to control functions which are unique to specific devices. Although Universal System Exclusive messages can be used even between devices of different manufacturers, most exclusive messages cannot be used between devices of different types or different manufacturers.

How do Roland exclusive messages identify the device for which the data is intended?

In order to recognize the device for which the data is intended, Roland exclusive messages contain a manufacturer ID, device ID and model ID. The SC-880 exclusive messages use two model IDs; 42H for GS format, and 45H for SC-55 (88). The two numbers are used depending on the parameter you wish to modify. Be aware that if the appropriate ID number is not used, data will not be transferred.

What happens when a General MIDI System On message is received?

When a General MIDI System On is received, the SC-880 will be set to the basic General MIDI settings. Also, NRPN Bank Select messages will no longer be received after General MIDI System On is received. The beginning of song data bearing the General MIDI logo contains a General MIDI System On message. This means that if you play back the data from the beginning, the sound generating device will automatically be initialized to the basic settings.

What happens when a GS Reset message is received?

When a GS Reset is received, the SC-880 will be set to the basic GS settings. Also, NRPN messages defined in the GS format can be received after a GS Reset is received. A GS System Reset message is at the beginning of song data bearing the GS logo. This means that if you play back the data from the beginning, the sound generating device will be automatically initialized to the basic settings.

What does the Master Volume message control?

This is an exclusive message common to all MIDI devices that controls the master volume of all Parts.

What are the other exclusive messages used for?

The SC-880 can receive GS format exclusive messages (model ID 42H) that are common to all GS sound generators. The SC-880 can also use exclusive messages (model ID 45H) that are especially for the SC-55 (88). Exclusive messages can be used to store the SC-880 settings or to make fine adjustments to parameters.

How can I select the sound (Tone) for each Part?

By sending MIDI messages from a MIDI keyboard or sequencer, you can remotely select the sound (Tone) for each Part. When you press a sound select button on a MIDI keyboard, a MIDI message selecting a sound will be transmitted. You can also use your personal computer to select the SC-880 sounds. You can specify sounds by inputting the Variation number and the Tone number into your computer program, but depending on your software the way in which numbers are displayed may differ, so be aware of this. On the SC-880, Variation numbers begin with 0, and Tone numbers begin with 1.

What do Variation numbers and Tone numbers correspond to?

Variation numbers correspond to MIDI Bank numbers, and Tone numbers correspond to MIDI Program numbers.

How many banks can be specified with MIDI Bank numbers?

MIDI Bank numbers have an upper (MSB) and lower (LSB) part. Each can specify a number from 0 to 127, allowing you to specify 128 x 128 = 16384 banks. The upper part of the Bank number corresponds to the SC-880 Variation number. The lower part provides selection of Tone Set 1, Tone Set 2, or Tone Set 3.

What happens if I specify a tone number that the SC-880 does not have?

If you specify a tone number that the SC-880 does not have, the tone will not change.

How do I select a Rhythm Set on the SC-880?

You can select Rhythm Sets by transmitting MIDI messages from a MIDI keyboard or sequencer. When a Program Change message is received, the Rhythm Set will change. Transmit a Program Change message on the channel being received by the Rhythm Part. With the factory settings, Part AlO is the Rhythm Part (MIDI receive channel: A10). On the SC-880, Rhythm Set numbers correspond to program numbers. Ensure to set the note numbers of the rhythm data being played back to match the note numbers of the unit Rhythm Set you are using.

What are the Exclusive Data Addresses for the SC-880?

As listed in “MIDI Implementation,” the address of MIDI exclusive data (GS format) is defined in units of 16 Parts. In other words, starting from address 40 00 00 are the parameters for 16 Parts. The SC-880 has data for another 16 Parts, making a total of 32 Parts. For this reason, the SC-880’s MIDI exclusive data format expands the addressing, and places the remaining 16 Parts at starting address 50 00 00.

How is Exclusive Data received on the SC-880?

In the same way as with channel messages, exclusive data received at MIDI IN A is passed to Part Group A, and exclusive data received at MIDI IN B is passed to Part Group B. In other words, exclusive data for the 32 Parts is received using two MIDI IN connectors. If this is done, each MIDI IN receives exclusive data for 16 Parts, so it is not necessary to split up the data into addresses 40 00 00 and 50 00 00. However, it is also possible for the SC-880 to receive exclusive data for all 32 Parts at a single MIDI IN. In this case, it is necessary to use address 50 00 00. For example, the data at starting address 40 00 00 will be passed to Part Group A, and the data at starting address 50 00 00 received at the same MIDI IN will be passed to Part Group B. In other words, using starting address 50 00 00 means that the data will be passed to the Parts of the other Group than the MIDI IN that the data was received at. Only in the case of Exclusive data, “Input Mode” has no effect on the way in which data is passed from the two MIDI IN connectors to the Parts.

How is Exclusive Data Transmitted on the SC-880?

Since the SC-880 has only one MIDI OUT, the exclusive data transmitted is sent using the two address areas of 40 00 00 and 50 00 00. User sound data is located at starting areas of 20 00 00. Be aware that exclusive data will be not transmitted from MIDI OUT connector if the MIDI OUT/THRU is set to THRU.

What are NRPNs and how are they used with GS Sound Modules?

Included within the various types of Control Changes (often abbreviated as “CC”) is an extended range known as NRPNs (non-registered parameter numbers). The NRPNs can be used with GS sound modules to alter various sound parameters, such as those for the vibrato, filters, and envelopes. There are distinct advantages to using Control Changes rather than Exclusive messages when wishing to modify sounds. They are not as complicated, they are easier to handle, and they do not require a large amount of data.

Are there specific functions defined for NRPNs?

The MIDI specifications do not define any specific functions which can be set using NRPNs. This is because the NRPNs are intended to serve as a flexible range of controls which can be assigned whatever parameters are required for a specific device in order to achieve the desired changes in its sounds, or enhance its expressive capabilities. In contrast, there is another type of extended form of control known as an RPN (registered parameter number). As their name suggests, RPN functions are all defined (registered) within the MIDI specifications.

How do I use an NRPN?

When using an NRPN, the function (sound parameter) being dealt with needs to be specified by means of the numeric values that are supplied for the NRPN MSB (Controller No. 99) and NRPN LSB (Controller No. 98). By then sending the appropriate value for Data Entry (Controller No. 6), the change in the specified sound parameter is accomplished. Note that instead of the hexadecimal notation that is used within the “MIDI Implementation,” the numbers for the combinations of values for NRPNs that appear in the chart below have all been converted to decimal. Note also that these NRPNs are specific only to GS sound modules.

What is the Function of the following NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB Combination?

NRPN MSB NRPN LSB Range Function
8 0-64-127 Vibrato Rate *1
9 0-64-127 Vibrato Depth *1
10 0-64-127 Vibrato Delay *1
32 0-64-127 TVF Cutoff Frequency *1
33 0-64-127 TVF Resonance *1
99 0-64-127 TVF&TVA Envelope Attack Time *1
100 0-64-127 TVF&TVA Envelope Decay Time *1
101 0-64-127 TVF&TVA Envelope Sustain Level *1
102 0-64-127 TVF&TVA Envelope Release Time *1
24 rr 0-64-127 Rhythm Tone Pitch Coarse *1 Alters the pitch of individual percussion instruments in the rhythm Part.
26 rr 0-127 Rhythm Tone TVA Level Alters the volume of individual percussion instruments in the rhythm Part.
28 rr 0, 1-64-127 Rhythm Tone Pan Alters the panning for individual percussion instruments in the Rhythm Part. A setting of “0” provides random panning, while “1” selects the leftmost position, “64” the center, and “127” places it at the rightmost position.
29 rr 0-127 Rhythm Tone Reverb Send Level Sets the reverb depth for individual percussion instruments in the Rhythm Part.
30 rr 0-127 Rhythm Tone Chorus Send Level Sets the chorus depth for individual percussion instruments in the Rhythm Part.
31 rr 0-127 Rhythm Tone Delay Send Level Determines the amount of delay for individual percussion instruments in the Rhythm Part (SC-88/88 Pro/SC-880 only).

How do I alter the TVF Cutoff Frequency using an NRPN?

First, you need to assert that it is the TVF Cutoff Frequency that you wish to control by sending the appropriate NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB combination. The value for Controller No. 99 is the NRPN MSB, and that for Controller No. 98 is the NRPN LSB. So, you would transmit these values:

  • Controller No. 99: 1
  • Controller No. 98: 32

The SC-880 has thus been made aware that it is the TVF Cutoff Frequency that you are going to change. To go ahead and make the actual change, you would then use the Data Entry Control Change message to supply the new value (xx) for the TVF Cutoff Frequency. Thus, you would send:

  • Controller No. 6: xx

As a result of transmitting the above three controller values, the TVF Cutoff Frequency will have been altered, and the timbre of the tone selected for that Part should sound differently.

What is a “null” and why should I send one after altering sound parameters using an NRPN?

After altering sound parameters using an NRPN, it is recommended that you make a habit of asserting a “null” by sending the RPN values shown below. This will tell the SC-880 that you are finished working with the parameter that has been specified, and that it should stop waiting for any further new values for that parameter. (It cancels the standing request for change in a particular NRPN or RPN.) This way you can avoid having unexpected changes made if any unintended Data Entry values get sent afterwards.

  • Controller No. 101: 127
  • Controller No. 100: 127

What value do I need to supply for “NRPN LSB rr?”

For the “NRPN LSB rr” value, you need to supply the value which corresponds to the note number of the particular percussion instrument that you want to address (these numbers can be found in the Rhythm Set List at the rear of the manual). For example, let’s say that you want to set the High Bongo so that no reverb will be applied to it. This instrument is assigned note number 60 (middle C), and is contained in the Standard Set 1 Rhythm Set. To accomplish this you would transmit these values:

  • Controller No. 99: 29
  • Controller No. 98: 60
  • Controller No. 6: 0

Note that these MIDI messages need to be sent in the order listed above.

*How are Parameters that are marked with 1 in the NRPN chart altered?

Parameters marked with *1 in the chart at left can be altered in a relative manner, with a value of “0” being the default value. Depending on the particular sound you are working with, the type of change available will be different (in some cases you may not even notice any change). Also, the range of change will vary. You may need to consult the manual that came with your equipment or software for details on how to properly input and transmit Control Change messages. Note, though, that some devices may only allow you to work with a limited range of controller numbers. Make sure that you always follow the order shown above when transmitting RPN, NRPN, and Data Entry data. Be careful, since if you insert a multiple number of MIDI messages at the same point in time (or in very close range of each other) when using some types of music software, the messages can sometimes be sent out in an order different than originally intended. To avoid problems, always allow sufficient space between adjacent messages (at least 1 tick at 96 TPQN, and 5 ticks at 480 TPQN).

  • TPQN: Ticks Per Quarter Note

What happens to NRPN values when a Program Change is received?

Any value which has been imposed by means of an NRPN will not be initialized even when a different sound is changed to in compliance with a received Program Change. Settings which have been made using NRPNs can only be initialized by sending a GS Reset, or by performing a GS Initialization.

Does the SC-880 respond to NRPN messages at the factory default settings?

At the factory default settings, the SC-880 will not respond to NRPN messages. However, after a GS Reset has been received it will recognize NRPNs. Alternately, you can enable recognition of NRPNs by turning on “NRPN,” either by using the panel buttons, or through Exclusive messages.

Why does the song data play back with the wrong sounds?

When song data created using the SC-55 or the SC-155 is played back by the SC-880, the sounds that were intended may not be selected. This can occur for one of the following two reasons:

  1. The wrong Variation number was selected. When a Variation number for which sounds do not exist is selected on the SC-880, the display will show a message of No TONE (or for the Rhythm Part, No Rhythm SET). Even if the relevant Part is not displayed, this message will be displayed briefly when any Part receives such data. The data that specifies sounds is usually placed in the beginning of the song data, so check whether this message appears when the song data starts. If this message appears, it is possible that a control change Bank Select message (or for the Rhythm Part, a program change) within the song is incorrect. Refer to the tone list, and modify the data value so that an existing tone is selected.
  2. The wrong sound map was selected. On the SC-880, the lower byte (LSB) of a control change Bank Select message (control change 32) can be used to switch tone Sets.

What are the Control Change 32 Values?

  • 00H: The tone set will not change.
  • 01H: Tone Set 1 will be selected.
  • 02H: Tone Set 2 will be selected.
  • 03H: Tone Set 3 will be selected.

If values other than these are transmitted to the SC-880, a tone Set for which the SC-880 has no tones will be selected, so a message of No TONE will appear. In the case of the SC-55 / 155 / 55mkll, the LSB of this Bank Select message is ignored, so sound selection will not be affected regardless of the value that is transmitted. However, since Bank Select messages are used as a pair of upper and lower values (MSB and LSB), it is best to input 00 as the lower value (LSB) in your song data.

How do I use a Part other than Part 10 as a Rhythm Part, so that two Rhythm Sets can be used simultaneously?

  • About the Part mode Each Part 1-16 can be used either for normal sounds (Normal Part) or for a Rhythm set (Rhythm Part). This selection is made by the Part Mode setting. The mode of a Rhythm Part can be either Rhythm 1 or Rhythm 2. Since the same Rhythm Set will automatically be selected for Parts that have the same Part Mode, this means that up to 2 types of Rhythm set can be used simultaneously. For example, if you set the Part Mode of Part AlO and Part All respectively to Rhythm 1 and Rhythm 2, you could select STANDARD 1 Set for Part AlO and JAZZ Set for Part All. If the Part Mode of both Parts AlO and All were set to Rhythm 1, selecting STANDARD 1 Set for Part AlO would automatically select STANDARD 1 Set for Part All as well.

  • Settings via MIDI To set the Part Mode using MIDI messages, you need to use system exclusive messages. For example, if you wish to set the Part Mode of Part All to Rhythm 2, transmit the following message:

    • F0 41 10 42 12 40 1 A 15 09 OF F7
      • 1 0: Device ID (17)
      • 40 1A 15: Address (USE FOR RHYTHM PART of Part A 11)
      • 02: Data (Part Mode Rhythm 2)

To select a Rhythm Set after setting the Part Mode, transmit a program change to Part All.

How do I use Aftertouch on the SC-880?

First, connect a device that is able to transmit aftertouch messages to the SC-880. Be aware that some MIDI keyboards are not able to transmit aftertouch messages. When the SC-880 receives aftertouch messages, the way in which it responds will depend on its settings. With the factory settings or immediately after the SC-880 has been initialized by a GS Reset, etc., aftertouch messages will have no effect, so you will need to change the settings if you want aftertouch to do something. Aftertouch parameters are divided into the following two groups:

  • Channel aftertouch (CAf): These messages apply an effect to the entire Part of a given channel. For example, if you hold down a “C-E-G” chord and then press strongly on just the “C” note, the effect will be applied to all notes “C-E-G.”
  • Polyphonic aftertouch (PAf): These messages apply an effect independently for each note number. For example, if you hold down a “C-E-G” chord and then press strongly on just the “C” note, the effect will be applied only to the “C” note.

Of the Channel Aftertouch parameters and Polyphonic aftertouch parameters, the following eleven can be set from the panel:

  • Range/Cutoff/Amp/LFO 1 Rate/LFO 1 Pitch/LFO 1 TVF/LFO 1 TVA/LFO 2 Rate/LFO 2 Pitch/LFO 2 TVF/LFO 2 TVA

All parameters (CAf: 11 types/PAf: 11 types) can be set by transmitting exclusive messages from a sequencer or computer. For details on the messages for these parameters, refer to MIDI Implementation.

How do I use MIDI to control the Depth of a System Effect?

  • Reverb/Chorus/Delay: The depth of the System effects Reverb/Chorus/Delay can be adjusted for each Part using control change messages.

    • Reverb Send Level (Controller number 91)
    • Chorus Send Level (Controller number 93)
    • Delay Send Level (Controller number 94)

    The Reverb/Chorus/Delay effects use a portion of the sound from each Part to create a new effect sound (reverberation, etc.) which can then be added to the original sound. The above three parameters control the amount of the sound (signal) of each Part that will be sent to the effect unit. Higher settings will increase the amount of the signal that is sent to the effect unit, causing more effect sound to be produced. The result is that the effect will be deeper.

  • Equalizer: The equalizer modifies the tonal character of the sound. You can specify whether or not the sound of a Part will be passed through the equalizer; i.e., turn the equalizer on/off. Settings are made using exclusive messages, not control change messages.

    • Setting example:
      • Turning the equalizer on for Part A01:
        • F0 41 10 42 12 40 41 20 01 SE F7

What are the Connections with my Computer for the SC-880?

The SC-880 can be controlled by music software running on a personal computer. This will allow you to create your own songs, and also to select sounds or edit sounds from the computer display. This type of system is known as a Desk Top Music System (DTMS). The functions provided by a DTMS differ widely depending on the software, so it is important that you choose software suited to your needs. There are two ways to connect the SC-880 to your computer; using the MIDI connectors or the computer connector. If you use the MIDI connectors, you will need to obtain a computer interface board (adapter) that has MIDI connectors (such as the Roland Super MPU, etc.). If you use the SC-880’s computer connector, you can use a special cable to connect it directly with the computer, but your software must be able to correspond to the serial port. If you wish to connect your computer via the MIDI connectors, refer to the “Connecting a computer via the MIDI connectors” section for how to make connections. The following explanation will show how to make connections using the SC-880 computer connector.

How do I make Connections with the Computer Connector?

  1. Turn the power of the SC-880 off, and set the COMPUTER switch located on the back of the SC-880.
    • Note: The Computer switch will be validated when the power is turned off and then on after the setting has been made.
    • The setting will depend on the type of computer you have and the software you use. The PC-1 baud rate is 31.25 Kbps (kilobits per second), and the PC-2 baud rate is 38.4 Kbps. Set the computer switch to the baud rate required by your MIDI application (software). Carefully read the manual for your software regarding the switch setting. In general, set the switch to PC-2 for PC, and to Mac for Apple Macintosh series.
  2. In step 2, the connections will be slightly different depending on the type of computer you are using, so read the section (2a, 2b) that applies to you.
    • 2a. If you’re using a PC, connect the computer cable to the serial port (RS-232C) connector on the rear of the computer.
      • Computer cable: RSC-1 SAT (sold separately)
      • This is a 9 pin cable. If you need a 25 pin cable, refer to the wiring diagram and purchase an appropriate cable.
    • 2b. If you’re using an Apple Macintosh computer, connect the computer cable to the modem port or printer port on the rear of the computer.
      • Computer cable: RSC-15APL (sold separately)
  3. Connect the other end of the computer cable to the SC-880’s computer connector (COMPUTER).
  4. Turn power of the SC-880 on.

What are some Cautions when using the SC-880 with PC?

Even if the SC-880 computer connector is connected to your personal computer, it will not operate correctly if the software (MIDI application) is incompatible. Be sure to use software that is compatible with the serial port of the personal computer. In some cases, other computer settings will be necessary, so read the owner’s manual for your software carefully, and make the appropriate settings before use.

How do I make Connections with MIDI Connectors?

Set the Computer select switch located on the back of the SC-880 to MIDI.

How is MIDI Data Transferred with the Computer?

Depending on the setting of the computer switch, MIDI data flow will be different as follows (with the factory settings):

  • When the computer switch is set to PC-1, PC-2 or Mac
    • In order for data received at MIDI IN A to be sent to the sound generating section, the Thru function of the computer software must be turned on. When the thru function is turned on, the data received at MIDI IN A will pass through the computer and be played by the sound generator section. When transmitting MIDI Exclusive data from the sound generator section via the SC-880’s MIDI OUT/THRU connector, it is also necessary for thru function to be on.
    • Data received at MIDI IN B will not be sent to the computer connector but will be passed directly to the sound generator section.
    • The number of sound generator Parts that can be controlled using the computer connector will depend on the software you are using. This means that if you are using the computer connector, you will not necessarily be able to play 32 Parts. Carefully read the operating manual for your software. Also be aware that although the SC-880 allows two connectors MIDI IN A and B to be used for 32 Part performance, this may be impossible to achieve depending on your software.
  • When the computer switch is set to MIDI
    • Be aware that when the computer switch located on the back of the SC-880 is set to MIDI, data will not be exchanged via the computer connector.
    • With the factory settings, MIDI OUT(THRU) is set to function as MIDI OUT. If you wish to use it as MIDI THRU, set the MIDI OUT/THRU to THRU.
    • Exclusive data address settings are explained in “Exclusive data” sections.
    • With the factory settings, MIDI messages received at MIDI IN A are passed to Part Group A, and MIDI messages received at MIDI IN B are passed to Part Group B. In most situations, there is no need to change this, but it is possible to change the MIDI signal flow.

How do I Connect another MIDI Sound Generator to the SC-880?

If you wish to connect another MIDI sound generator to the SC-880’s MIDI OUT /THRU connector, be aware of the following points.

How do I use another Sound Generator to Play Data received at the Computer Connector?

In this situation, set MIDI OUT /THRU to OUT. Computer data received at the computer connector will be transmitted from the SC-880 MIDI OUT /THRU connector.

How do I use another Sound Generator to Play Data received at MIDI IN A?

In this situation, set MIDI OUT /THRU to THRU. Data received at MIDI IN A will be transmitted just as it is from MIDI OUT/THRU.

  • Data received at MIDI IN B will not be passed THRU even if THRU is selected. Regardless of the Input Mode setting, data from MIDI IN B will not be THRUed.

What should I do if the SC-880 does not function in the way I expect?

First check the following points. If this does not resolve the problem, consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Center (listed at the end of this manual).

  • If a message appears during operation, consult the following section “If a message appears.”
  • If performance is incorrect when playing back song data carrying the General MIDI/GS logo, check the following points.
    • That the Device ID is set to 17.
    • That the General MIDI System On/GS Reset Receive Switch is turned on. The above settings are made when the SC-880 is shipped from the factory.

What do I do if I cannot turn the power on?

  • Is the power cord plugged properly into an outlet?

What do I do if there is no sound?

  • Is the power turned on for the other devices connected to the SC-880?
  • Is the volume knob turned all the way down?
  • Have you incorrectly connected the MIDI IN and OUT connectors?
  • Can you hear sound through headphones? (Phrase Preview the sound.) If you can hear sound through headphones, the problem may be that the audio cable transmitting the sound to the other devices is broken or incorrectly connected, or that there is a problem with your mixer/ amp/ speaker system.
  • Do the bar indicators in the display move?
    • (1) If the bar indicators are moving…
      • The SC-880 is receiving MIDI data correctly. Check the volume knob position and the cable connections once again.
    • (2) If the bar indicators are not moving…
      • Is the lowest dot in the bar display turned off?
        • If some of the dots are off, the Part Mute function is on.
        • Turn off the Part Mute function.
  • Is the overall volume for all parts turned down?
  • Has the Expression pedal, etc., on a connected MIDI device turned the volume down?
  • Are the settings for the OUTPUT 1, 2 jacks correct?
  • Is the rear panel Computer switch set to the correct position for the software you are using? After changing the position of the Computer switch you must turn power of the SC-880 on.

What do I do if a specific Part does not sound?

  • Is the lowest dot in the bar display off? Parts for which this dot is off have been muted. Turn Part Mute off.
  • Is the volume level of the Part turned down?
  • Does the MIDI Receive channel of the Part match the MIDI Transmit channel of the connected MIDI device?

What do I do if a specific keyboard area does not sound?

  • Has the Keyboard Range been set?

What do I do if sound is heard but the bar indicator does not move?

  • Are you receiving MIDI messages at MIDI IN B and viewing Part information for Part Group A? If so, press the PART [ ◄] [ ► ] buttons to display the Part Group B. If you press the [INFO] button to make the indicator light, Part information for both Part Group A and B will be displayed.

What do I do if I cannot select the desired sound?

  • Are you sending an incorrect Program number?
  • Have you specified the Control channel of a Patch?
  • Has the System mode parameter “Tone Set Range” been set to “Tone Set Range:1” or “Tune Set Range:2”?

What do I do if the sound is distorted?

  • Is an effect which distorts the sound being applied?
  • If a specific sound or Part is distorted, lower the volume level of that Part.
  • If all sounds are distorted, lower the overall volume level of all Parts, or use the Volume knob to lower the volume level.

What do I do if the pitch is incorrect?

  • Is the pitch of a specific Part incorrect?
  • Is the pitch of all Parts incorrect by a semitone or more?
  • Is the pitch of a specific Part incorrect by a semitone or more?
  • Has a MIDI Pitch Bend message been received to change the pitch? Return the pitch bend lever or wheel to the central position. Or, transmit a Pitch Bend message with the central value (40 OOH).

What do I do if the sound is wrong?

Have you selected another sound after modifying sound parameter settings (filter, etc.)? Restore all sound parameter settings to a value of 0.

How does the SC-880 process the lower part of the bank select message (LSB)?

The SC-880 processes the lower part of the bank select message (LSB) as follows:

Least significant byte (LSB)

  • 00H The tone set will not change.
  • 01 H Tone Set 1 will be selected.
  • 02H Tone Set 2 will be selected.
  • 03H Tone Set 3 will be selected.

If I want to select the Piano3w sound, what messages should I transmit to the SC-880?

If we use the previous example of selecting the Piano3w sound, we would transmit:

  1. BnH OOH 08H
  2. BnH 20H 03H
  3. CnH 02H

…to the SC-880, and Piano3w of Tone Set 3 will be selected. If we transmit BnH 20H 0lH in step 2, Piano3w of Tone Set 1 will be selected. If we transmit BnH 20H 02H in step 2, Piano3w of Tone Set 2 will be selected.

If I attempt to play more than 64 voices at once, sounds will be interrupted. What is the solution?

Sounds will be interrupted if you attempt to play more than 64 voices at once.

MIDI sound generators connected to the SC-880 are not played from a computer or sequencer. How can I fix this?

Music data received at the SC-880 Computer connector is transmitted from the MIDI OUT/THRU connector, but you need to make the following settings:

  • Set the Computer switch to PC-1, PC-2, or Mac depending on your software.
  • Set MIDI OUT/THRU Select switch to OUT.

MIDI data received at MIDI IN A is transmitted from the MIDI OUT /THRU connector, but I need to make some settings. What are they?

You need to make the following settings:

  • Set the Computer switch to MIDI.
  • Set the MIDI OUT/THRU to THRU.

After changing the setting for MIDI OUT/THRU, or Rapid Mode, the settings are not in effect. How do I make them take effect?

The power must be turned on again. These settings will take effect the next time the power is turned on.

The error message, “Battery Low”, appears on my display. What does this mean?

The memory backup battery inside the SC-880 has run down. You should consult a nearby Roland Service Center.

The error message, “Check Sum Error”, appears on my display. What does this mean and what should I do?

The checksum of the received exclusive message is incorrect. You should check the data that was transmitted to the SC-880, and transmit it once again. Also, make sure that the MIDI cable is not damaged.

The error message, “MIDI Buffer Full”, appears on my display. What does this mean and what should I do?

A large amount of MIDI data was received by the SC-880 in a time too short for the correct processing to be done. You should check whether a large amount of MIDI data is not being transmitted in a short time.

The error message, “MIDI Off Line”, appears on my display. What does this mean and what should I do?

It is possible that the power has been turned off for the MIDI device connected to MIDI IN. Check the power of the connected MIDI device. It is also possible that a MIDI cable has been pulled out or broken. Check the MIDI cables. The problem is not with the SC-880.

The error message, “No TONE”, appears on my display. What does this mean and what should I do?

A sound (Tone) which the SC-880 does not have has been selected. The previously selected sound name will be displayed, and that sound will be heard. Carefully refer to the tables in the PDF, and specify the correct bank number and program number.

The error message, “No RHYTHM SET”, appears on my display. What does this mean and what should I do?

A Rhythm Set which the SC-880 does not have has been selected. The previously selected Rhythm Set name will be displayed, and that set will sound.

The error message, “No PATCH”, appears on my display. What does this mean and what should I do?

A Patch which the SC-880 does not have has been selected. The previously selected Patch name will be displayed, and that Patch will sound.

The error message, “No PERFORMANCE”, appears on my display. What does this mean and what should I do?

A Performance which the SC-880 does not have has been selected. The previously selected Performance name will be displayed, and that Performance will sound.

Is the same data being sent simultaneously to MIDI IN A and MIDI IN B?

The SC-880 is able to play only from either MIDI IN A or MIDI IN B. Make sure that the Input Mode is set to Standard. If the Input Mode is set to A Only, data received at MIDI IN B will not be played.

Exclusive messages are not received. What should I do?

Does the Device ID number of the transmitted exclusive message match the Device ID number of the SC-880?

The SC-880 does not transmit MIDI data. How can I make it transmit data?

If you wish to transmit the SC-880 data via the Computer connector, set the Computer switch to PC-1, PC-2 or Mac, depending on the software you are using. When the rear panel Computer switch is set to MIDI, the SC-880 will not transmit data from the Computer connector. In this case, data will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT /THRU connector. When the MIDI OUT/THRU is set to THRU, data received at MIDI IN A will be transmitted from MIDI OUT/THRU.

What are the rhythm sets of the SC-880 organized as?

The rhythm sets of the SC-880 are organized as follows:

  • The Tone Set 3 has 25 types.
  • The Tone Set 2 has 14 types.
  • The Tone Set 1 has 10 types.

What is the purpose of the sounds in the STANDARD 3 rhythm set that have “RND” appended to their name (such as Kick, Snare, and Hi-Hat) in the list that will change randomly with each note played?

The purpose of the sounds that have “RND” appended to their name and change randomly with each note played (these changes affect the timbre and timing) is to create a more natural-sounding performance–even if all note messages for percussive instruments are sent with absolute precision, subtle fluctuations will be applied so the performance sounds less mechanical. Note, however, that you may not always be able to obtain the desired effect, depending on the circumstances.

What are legato-enabled sounds?

Legato-enabled sounds use more than one voice.

What are percussive sounds?

Percussive sounds which cannot be played melodically. Use near C4 (note number 60).

What do the same sounds as Tone Set 2 mean?

Same sounds as the Tone Set 2 rhythm sets.

What does the same sound as Tone Set 1 mean?

Same sound as Tone Set 1.

What does PC mean?

PC means program number (Tone number).

What does CC00 mean?

CC00 means the value of controller number 0 (Bank number, Variation number).

What do Voices mean?

Voices mean the number of voices used by the Tone.

What does the plus sign (+) mean?

The plus sign (+) means that percussion sounds of the same number will not be heard at the same time.

What does (1) mean?

(1) means that the sound is the same as the sound of SC-55.

What are the PC numbers for Standard 1?

The PC numbers for Standard 1 are PC1 and PC2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 20?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 20 are Standard 1 Kick 2 and Standard 2 Kick 2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 21?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 21 are Standard 1 Kick 1 and Standard 2 Kick 1.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 22?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 22 are Standard 1 Snare 1 and Standard 2 Snare 1.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 23?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 23 are Standard 1 Snare 2 and Standard 2 Snare 2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 24?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 24 are Closed Hi-Hat [EXC1] and Closed Hi-Hat.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 25?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 25 are Pedal Hi-Hat [EXC1] and Pedal Hi-Hat.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 26?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 26 are Open Hi-Hat [EXC1] and Open Hi-Hat.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 27?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 27 are Crash Cymbal 1.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 28?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 28 are Ride Cymbal 1.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 29?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 29 are Ride Bell.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 30?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 30 are Tambourine.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 31?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 31 are Splash Cymbal.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 32?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 32 are Cowbell.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 33?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 33 are Crash Cymbal 2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 34?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 34 are Vibra-slap.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 35?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 35 are Ride Cymbal 2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 36?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 36 are High Bongo.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 37?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 37 are Low Bongo.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 38?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 38 are Mute High Conga.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 39?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 39 are Open High Conga.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 40?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 40 are Low Conga.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 41?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 41 are High Timbale.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 42?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 42 are Low Timbale.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 43?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 43 are High Agogo.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 44?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 44 are Low Agogo.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 45?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 45 are Cabasa.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 46?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 46 are Maracas.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 47?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 47 are Short High Whistle [EXC2].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 48?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 48 are Long Low Whistle [EXC2].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 49?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 49 are Short Guiro [EXC3].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 50?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 50 are Long Guiro [EXC3].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 51?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 51 are Claves.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 52?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 52 are High Wood Block.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 53?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 53 are Low Wood Block.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 54?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 54 are Mute Cuica [EXC4].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 55?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 55 are Open Cuica [EXC4].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 56?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 56 are Mute Triangle [EXC5].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 57?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 57 are Open Triangle [EXC5].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 58?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 58 are Shaker.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 59?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 59 are Jingle Bell.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 60?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 60 are Bell Tree.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 61?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 61 are Bar Chimes.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 62?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 62 are Castanets.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 63?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 63 are Mute Surdo [EXC6].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 64?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 64 are Open Surdo [EXC6].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 65?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 65 are Applause 2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 66?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 66 are Side Stick.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 67?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 67 are Low Tom 2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 68?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 68 are Low Tom 1.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 69?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 69 are Mid Tom 2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 70?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 70 are Mid Tom 1.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 71?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 71 are High Tom 2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 72?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 72 are High Tom 1.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 73?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 73 are Chinese Cymbal.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 74?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 74 are MC-500 Beep 1.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 75?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 75 are MC-500 Beep 2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 76?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 76 are Concert SD.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 77?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 77 are Snare Roll.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 78?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 78 are Finger Snap 2.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 79?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 79 are Finger Snap.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 80?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 80 are High Q.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 81?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 81 are Slap.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 82?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 82 are Scratch Push [EXC7].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 83?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 83 are Scratch Pull [EXC7].

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 84?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 84 are Sticks.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 85?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 85 are Square Click.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 86?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 86 are Metronome Click.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 87?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 87 are Metronome Bell.

What are the standard 1 sounds for note number 88?

The Standard 1 sounds for note number 88 are Hand Clap and TR-909 Hand Clap.

What are the PC numbers for Standard 3?

The PC numbers for Standard 3 are PC3 and PC9.

What are the Standard 3 sounds for note number 20?

The Standard 3 sounds for note number 20 are Standard 3 Kick 2 and Room Kick 2 [RND] Kick.

What are the Standard 3 sounds for note number 21?

The Standard 3 sounds for note number 21 are [RND] Snare and Room Snare 1.

What are the Standard 3 sounds for note number 22?

The Standard 3 sounds for note number 22 are Standard 3 Snare 2 and Room Snare 2.

What are the Standard 3 sounds for note number 24?

The Standard 3 sounds for note number 24 are [RND] Closed Hi-Hat [EXC1] and Closed Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the Standard 3 sounds for note number 25?

The Standard 3 sounds for note number 25 are [RND] Pedal Hi-Hat [EXC1] and Pedal Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the Standard 3 sounds for note number 26?

The Standard 3 sounds for note number 26 are [RND] Open Hi-Hat [EXC1] and Open Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the Standard 3 sounds for note number 27?

The Standard 3 sounds for note number 27 are [RND] Crash Cymbal.

What are the Standard 3 sounds for note number 28?

The Standard 3 sounds for note number 28 are [RND] Ride Bell 1.

What are the Standard 3 sounds for note number 32?

The Standard 3 sounds for note number 32 are [RND] Ride Cymbal 2.

What are the PC numbers for Hip Hop?

The PC number for Hip Hop is PC10.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 20?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 20 are Hip-Hop Kick 2.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 21?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 21 are Hip-Hop Kick 1.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 22?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 22 are TR-808 Rim Shot.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 23?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 23 are Rap Snare.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 24?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 24 are Room Closed Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 25?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 25 are Pedal Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 26?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 26 are Room Open Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 27?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 27 are TR-909 Crash Cymbal.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 28?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 28 are Reverse Cymbal.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 30?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 30 are Shake Tambourine.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 32?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 32 are TR-808 Cowbell.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 38?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 38 are TR-808 Maracas.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 49?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 49 are CR-78 Guiro [EXC3].

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 51?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 51 are TR-808 Claves.

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 82?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 82 are Scratch Push 2 [EXC7].

What are the Hip Hop sounds for note number 83?

The Hip Hop sounds for note number 83 are Scratch Pull 2 [EXC7].

What are the PC numbers for Jungle?

The PC number for Jungle is PC11.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 20?

The Jungle sounds for note number 20 are Jungle Kick 2.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 21?

The Jungle sounds for note number 21 are Jungle Kick 1.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 22?

The Jungle sounds for note number 22 are TR-808 Rim Shot.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 23?

The Jungle sounds for note number 23 are Jungle Snare 1.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 24?

The Jungle sounds for note number 24 are TR-606 Closed Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 25?

The Jungle sounds for note number 25 are Jungle Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 26?

The Jungle sounds for note number 26 are TR-608 Open Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 27?

The Jungle sounds for note number 27 are TR-808 Crash Cymbal.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 28?

The Jungle sounds for note number 28 are Reverse Cymbal.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 30?

The Jungle sounds for note number 30 are Shake Tambourine.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 32?

The Jungle sounds for note number 32 are TR-808 Cowbell.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 36?

The Jungle sounds for note number 36 are TR-909 Crash Cymbal.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 38?

The Jungle sounds for note number 38 are TR-808 Maracas.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 49?

The Jungle sounds for note number 49 are CR-78 Guiro [EXC3].

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 51?

The Jungle sounds for note number 51 are TR-808 Claves.

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 82?

The Jungle sounds for note number 82 are Scratch Push 2 [EXC7].

What are the Jungle sounds for note number 83?

The Jungle sounds for note number 83 are Scratch Pull 2 [EXC7].

What are the PC numbers for Techno?

The PC number for Techno is PC12.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 20?

The Techno sounds for note number 20 are Techno Kick 2.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 21?

The Techno sounds for note number 21 are Techno Kick 1.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 23?

The Techno sounds for note number 23 are Techno Snare 1.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 24?

The Techno sounds for note number 24 are TR-707 Closed Hi-Hat.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 25?

The Techno sounds for note number 25 are CR-78 Closed Hi-Hat.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 26?

The Techno sounds for note number 26 are TR-909 Open Hi-Hat.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 27?

The Techno sounds for note number 27 are TR-909 Crash Cymbal.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 28?

The Techno sounds for note number 28 are Reverse Cymbal.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 30?

The Techno sounds for note number 30 are Shake Tambourine.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 32?

The Techno sounds for note number 32 are TR-808 Cowbell.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 38?

The Techno sounds for note number 38 are TR-808 Maracas.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 49?

The Techno sounds for note number 49 are CR-78 Guiro.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 51?

The Techno sounds for note number 51 are TR-808 Claves.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 82?

The Techno sounds for note number 82 are Scratch Push 2.

What are the Techno sounds for note number 83?

The Techno sounds for note number 83 are Scratch Pull 2.

What are the PC numbers for Power?

The PC number for Power is PC17.

What are the Power sounds for note number 20?

The Power sounds for note number 20 are Power Kick 2.

What are the Power sounds for note number 21?

The Power sounds for note number 21 are Power Kick 1.

What are the Power sounds for note number 22?

The Power sounds for note number 22 are Power Snare 1.

What are the Power sounds for note number 23?

The Power sounds for note number 23 are Power Snare 2.

What are the Power sounds for note number 24?

The Power sounds for note number 24 are Closed Hi-Hat 2 [EXC1].

What are the Power sounds for note number 26?

The Power sounds for note number 26 are Open Hi-Hat 2 [EXC1].

What are the PC numbers for Electronic?

The PC number for Electronic is PC25.

What are the Electronic sounds for note number 20?

The Electronic sounds for note number 20 are Electric Kick 2.

What are the Electronic sounds for note number 21?

The Electronic sounds for note number 21 are Electric Kick 1.

What are the Electronic sounds for note number 22?

The Electronic sounds for note number 22 are Electric Snare 1.

What are the Electronic sounds for note number 23?

The Electronic sounds for note number 23 are Electric Snare 2.

What are the PC numbers for TR-808?

The PC number for TR-808 is PC26.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 20?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 20 are TR-808 Kick 2.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 21?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 21 are TR-808 Kick 1.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 22?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 22 are TR-808 Rim Shot.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 23?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 23 are TR-808 Snare 1.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 24?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 24 are TR-808 Closed Hi-Hat 2 [EXC1].

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 25?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 25 are TR-808 Closed Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 26?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 26 are TR-808 Open Hi-Hat [EXC1].

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 27?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 27 are TR-808 Crash Cymbal.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 28?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 28 are CR-78 Tambourine.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 29?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 29 are TR-608 Ride Cymbal.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 30?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 30 are TR-808 Cowbell.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 32?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 32 are TR-808 Cowbell and TR-909 Crash Cymbal.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 33?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 33 are Ride Cymbal 2.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 38?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 38 are TR-808 Maracas.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 49?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 49 are CR-78 Guiro [EXC3].

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 51?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 51 are TR-808 Claves.

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 82?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 82 are Scratch Push 2 [EXC7].

What are the TR-808 sounds for note number 83?

The TR-808 sounds for note number 83 are Scratch Pull 2 [EXC7].

What is the PC number for CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds)?

001-064

What is the PC number for CM-64 Sound Map (LA Sounds)?

001-128

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 001?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 001 is Piano 2 with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 002?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 002 is Piano 2 with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 003?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 003 is Piano 2 with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 004?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 004 is Honky-tonk with 2 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 005?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 005 is Piano 1 with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 006?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 006 is Piano 2 with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 007?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 007 is Piano 2 with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 008?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 008 is E.Piano 1 with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 009?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 009 is Detuned EP1 with 2 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 010?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 010 is E.Piano 2 with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 011?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 011 is Steel Gt with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 012?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 012 is Steel Gt with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 013?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 013 is 12-str.Gt with 2 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 014?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 014 is Funk Gt with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 015?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 015 is Muted Gt with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 016?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 016 is Slae Bass with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 017?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 017 is Slae Bass with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 018?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 018 is Slae Bass with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 019?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 019 is Slae Bass with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 020?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 020 is Slae Bass with 2 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 021?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 021 is Slae Bass with 2 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 022?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 022 is Slae Bass with 2 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 023?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 023 is Slae Bass with 2 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 024?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 024 is Fingered Bs with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 025?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 025 is Fingered Bs with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 026?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 026 is Picked Bass with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 027?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 027 is Picked Bass with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 028?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 028 is Fretless Bs with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 029?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 029 is Acoustic Bs with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 030?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 030 is Choir Aahs with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 031?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 031 is Choir Aahs with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 032?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 032 is Choir Aahs with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 033?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 033 is Choir Aahs with 0 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 034?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 034 is SlowStrings with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 035?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 035 is Strings with 1 voice.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 036?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 036 is SynStrings3 with 2 voices.

What are the CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 037?

The CM-64 Sound Map (PCM Sounds) for PC 037 is S)lnStrings3 with 2 voices.

For note number 0-19 and 97-127, refer to p. 145.

What is the same sound as the percussion sound of “STANDARD1” (PC1)?

The same sound as the percussion sound of “STANDARD1” (PC1) is marked with a “<-” symbol.

What does the “—” symbol mean?

The “—” symbol means no sound.

What does “” mean?

“” means the same sound as the sound of SC-55.

What does “” mean?

“” means the same as the sound of SC-88.

What does “*” mean?

“*” means tones which are created using two voices.

What does “[EXC]” mean?

“[EXC]” means percussion sounds of the same number will not be heard at the same time.

What are the Rhythm Set (Tone Set 3) note numbers 0-19 and 97-127?

Note Number PC10 Hip-Hop PC11 JUNGLE PC 12 TECHNO PC25 ELECTRONIC PC26 TR-808 PC 1 STANDARD 1 PC27 DANCE PC 2 STANDARD 2 PC28 CR-78 PC 3 STANDARD 3 PC29 TR-606 PC9 ROOM PC30 TR-707 PC 17 POWER PC31 TR-909
0 Standard 1 Kick 1 Electric Kick 2 Standard 1 Kick 2 Electric Kick 1 Standard 2 Kick t CR-78 Kick 1 Standard 2 Kick 2 CR-78 Kick 2 Kick Drum 1 TR-606 Kick1 Kick Drum 2 TR-707 Kick 1 Jazz Kick 1 TR-808 Kick
1 Jazz Kick 2 TR-808 Kick Room Kick 1 TR-808 Kick 2 Room Kick 2 Power Kick 1 Power Kick 2 Dance Kick Electric Kick 2 TR-909 Kick
2 Electric Kick 1 Hip-Hop Kick 2 Electric Kick 2 Hip-Hop Kick 3 TR-808 Kick Dance Kick Electric Kick 2 TR-909 Kick 1 Electric Kick 1 TR-909 Kick 1
3 Jungle Kick 1 TR-909 Kick TR-808 Kick Techno Kick 1 Bounce Kick
4 Jungle Kick 2 Techno Kick 2 Dance Kick Voice One
5 Techno Kick 2 Dance Kick Bounce Kick Voice Two
6 Voice One Voice Three
7 Voice Two
8 Voice Three
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
97 Standard t Snare1 Techno Hit Standard t Snare 2 PhlllyH,I Standard 2 Snare 1 Impact Hit Standard 2 Snare 2 Lo-Fl Rave Snare Drum 2 Barn Hit Standard 1 Snare 1 Sim Hit Standard 1 Snare 2 Tape Rewind
98 Standard 1 Snare 3 Phonograph Noise Jazz Snare 1 Power Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2 Dance Snare 1 Room Snare 1 Dance Snare 2
99 Room Snare 2 Disco Snare Power Snare 1 Electric Snare 2 Power Snare 2 Electric Snare Gated Snare
100 Electric Snare 3 Dance Snare 1 Dance Snare 2 TR-606 Snare 2 Disco Snare Electric Snare 2 Electric Snare 3
101 Dance Snare 1 Dance Snare 2 Disco Snare TR-707 Snare 1 Electric Snare 2 TR-808 Snare 2 Electric Snare
102 Dance Snare 2 Disco Snare Electric Snare 2 TR-808 Snare 1 Electric Snare 3 Electric Snare TR-808 Snare 2
103 Disco Snare Electric Snare 2 Electric Snare 3 TR-909 Snare 1 TR-707 Snare 1 TR-909 Snare 1 Electric Snare 3
104 Electric Snare 2 TR-808 Snare 1 TR-909 Snare 1 TR-909 Snare 2 TR-808 Snare 1 TR-909 Snare 2 TR-909 Snare 1
105 Electric Snare 3 TR-808 Snare 2 TR-909 Snare 2 TR-909 Snare 1 TR-909 Snare 2 TR-909 Snare 1 TR-909 Snare 2
106 TR-808 Snare 2 TR-909 Snare 1 TR-909 Snare 2 Rap Snare TR-909 Snare 2 Rap Snare Jungle Snare
107 TR-909 Snare 1 TR-909 Snare 2 Rap Snare Jungle Snare House Snare 1 Jungle Snare 1 Rap Snare
108 TR-909 Snare 2 Rap Snare House Snare House Snare 1 Jungle Snare 2 House Snare House Snare 1
109 Rap Snare Jungle Snare House Snare 1 House Snare 2 Techno Snare 1 House Snare 2 House Snare 2
110 Jungle Snare House Snare House Snare 2 Slappy Techno Snare 2 Voice Tah Slappy
111 House Snare House Snare 2 Slappy House Snare 2
112 House Snare 2 Slappy
113 Slappy
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127

What are the Rhythm Set (Tone Set 3) note numbers 20-96 for PC33 (JAZZ) and PC41 (BRUSH)?

Note Number PC33 JAZZ PC41 BRUSH
20 Brush Tap 1 Brush Tap 2
21 Brush Tap 2 Brush Slap 1
22 Brush Slap 1 Brush Slap 2
23 Brush Slap 2 Brush Slap 3
24 Brush Slap 3 Brush Swirl 1
25 Brush Swirl 1 Brush Swirl 2
26 Brush Swirl 2 Brush Long Swirl
27 Brush Long Swirl Jazz Snare 1
28 Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare 2
29 Jazz Snare 2 Standard 1 Snarel
30 Standard 1 Snarel Standard 1 Snare2
31 Standard 1 Snare2 Standard 2 Snare1
32 Standard 2 Snare1 Standard 2 Snare2
33 Standard 2 Snare2 Snare Drum 2
34 Snare Drum 2 Standard 1 Snare 1
35 Standard 1 Snare 1 Standard 1 Snare 2
36 Standard 1 Snare 2 Standard 1 Snare 3
37 Standard 1 Snare 3 Room Snare 1
38 Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2
39 Room Snare 2 Power Snare 1
40 Power Snare 1 Power Snare 2
41 Power Snare 2 Gated Snare
42 Gated Snare Dance Snara 1
43 Dance Snara 1 Dance Snara 2
44 Dance Snara 2 Disco Snare
45 Disco Snare Electnc Snare 2
46 Electnc Snare 2 Bectric Snare 3
47 Electnc Snare 3
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

What are the Rhythm Set (Tone Set 3) note numbers 20-96 for PC49 (ORCHESTRA)?

Note Number PC 49 ORCHESTRA
20 Applause 2
21 Small Club 1
22 Timpani 0#
23 Timpani E
24 Timpani F
25 Timpani F#
26 Timpani G
27 Timpani G#
28 Timpani A
29 Timpani A#
30 Timpani B
31 Timpani c
32 Timpani c#
33 Timpani d
34 Timpani d#
35 Timpani e
36 Timpani f
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

What are the Rhythm Set (Tone Set 3) note numbers 20-96 for PC51 (KICK & SNARE)?

Note Number PC 51 KICK & SNARE
20 Jungle Snare 1
21 Jungle Snare 2
22 Techno Snare 1
23 Techno Snare 2
24 House Snare 2
25 CR-7BSnare 1
26 CR-7B Snare 2
27 TR-606 Snare 1
28 TR-606 Snare 2
29 TR-707 Snare 1
30 TR-707 Snare 2
31 Standard 3 Snare 2
32 TR-BOB Snare 2
33 TR-909 Snare 1
34 TR-909 Snare 2
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

What are the Rhythm Set (Tone Set 2) note numbers 0-96?

Note Number PC1 STANDARD 1 PC 2 STANDARD 2 PC9 ROOM PC 17 POWER PC25 ELECTRONIC PC26 TR-808/909 PC 27 DANCE PC33 JAZZ PC41 BRUSH PC49 ORCHESTRA
0 Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push2 [EXC7] HighQ Slap Closed Hl-hal2 [EXC1]
1 Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull2 [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7] Pedal Hi-ha! [EXC1]
2 Sticks Square Click Scratch Pull [EXC7] Open Hi-hal2 [EXC1]
3 Metronome Click Ride Cymball
4 Metronome Bell
5 Standard 1 Kick 2 Slaadard 2 Kick 2 Room Kick2 Power Kick2 Electric Kick 2 <-909 Bass Drum Dance Kick Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1
6 Standard 1 Kick 1 Standard 2 Kick 1 Room Kick 1 Power Kick 1 Electric Kick 1 808 Bass Drum Electric Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 1 Concert 8D1
7 Side Slick 808 Rim Shot Concert SD
8 Standard 1 Snare 1 Standard 2 Snare 1 Room Snare 1 Power Snare 1 Eleclric Snare 1 <-808 Snare 1 Dance Snare 1 Jazz Snare 1 Brush Tapl Concer1 SD
9 Hand Clap 909 Snare 1 Dance Snare 2 Jazz Snare 2 Brush Swirtl Concert SD
10 Standard 1 Snare 2 Slandard 2 Snare 2 Room Snare 2 Power Snare 2 Electric Snare 2 808 LowTom2 Eleclric Low T om2 Brush Low Tom2 nmpanl F
11 LowTom2 Room Low Tom2 Power low Tom2 Electric Low Tom2 808CHH [EXC1] CR-78CHH [EXC1] Closed Hl-ha12 [EXC1] Brush Closed Hi-hal [EXC1] Timpani F#
12 LowTom1 Room Low Tom1 Power Low Toml Electric Low Tom 1 808LowTom1 Electric Low Tom1 Brush Low Toml TimpaniG
13 Pedal Hi-hat [EXC1] 808CHH [EXC1] 808CHH [EXC1] TimpaniG#
14 MidTom2 Room Mid Tom2 Power Mid Tom2 Electric Mid T om2 808MldTom2 Electric Mid Tom2 Brush Mid Tom2 T1mpaniA
15 Open Hi-hall [EXC1] Open Hi-hat2 (EXC1] Open Hi-hal3 [EXC1] Open Hi-hal3 [EXC1] Open Hi-hal2 (EXC1] 808OHH [EXC1] CR-78OHH [EXC1] Open Hi-ha12 [EXC1] Brush Open Hi-hat [EXC1] Tllllpani A#
16 MidTom1 Room Mid Toml Power Mid Tom1 Electric Mid Tom1 808 MidTorn1 Electric Mid Tom1 Brush Mrd Toml Timpani B
17 High Tom2 RoomHITom2 Power Hi T om2 Electric HI Tom2 808 Hi Tom2 Electric High Tom2 Brush Hi Tom2 Timpani c
18 Crash Cymbal1 High Toml RoomHiTom1 Power Hi Tom1 Electric HI Tom1 808 Cymbal Brush Crash Cymbal Timpani c#
19 Aide Cymbal1 Chinese Cymbal Reverse Cymbal 808HiTom1 Electric High Tom1 Brush Hi Tom1 Timpani d
20 Ride BeH Tambourine Splash Cymba Brush Ride Cymbal Timpanld#
21 Cowbell Reverse Cymbal Timpani e
22 Crash Cymbal2 Brush Ride Bell TUTlpanl I
23
24 Aide Cymbal2 Concert Cymbal2
25 High Bongo 808 Cowbell Concer1 Cymbal1
26 Low Bongo
27 Mute High Conga 808 High Conga
28 Opan High Conga 808 Mid Conga
29 Low Conga <-808 Low Conga
30 High Timbale
31 Low Timbale
32 HighAgogo
33 LowAgogo
34
35 Cabasa 808 Meracas
36
37 Maracas
38 Short Hi Whislle [EXC2]
39 Long Low Whistle iEXC2]
40
41 Short Guiro IEXC3J
42 Long Guiro [EXC3] 808 Glaves
43 Glaves
44 High Wood Block

What does the “MSB/LSB” column show?

The “MSB/LSB” column shows the following portion of the Exclusive message (Hexadecimal notation) for Effect Type (Data section) F0 41 dev 42 12 40 03 00 ****sum F7. For Effect Parameter (LSB part of address) F0 41 dev 42 12 40 03 •• data sum F7 (dev: device ID, sum: checksum).

What do the parameters that have a “+” in front of their name indicate?

Parameters that have a “+” in front of their name can be modified by Effect Control I (Srcl).

What do the parameters that have a “#” in front of their name indicate?

Parameters that have a “#” in front of their name can be modified by Effect Control 2 (Src2).

What do the values shown in boldface in the “Setting Value” column indicate?

Values shown in boldface in the “Setting Value” column are the default value of the parameter.

Where can the correspondence between setting values and hexadecimal values for items in the Value column indicated with “*” be found?

The correspondence between setting values and hexadecimal values for items in the Value column indicated with “*” is shown in “Effect Parameter Value Conversion Table.”

What effects modify the tone color (filter type)?

  • P-00: Thru
  • P-01: Stereo-EQ
  • P-02: Spectrum
  • P-03: Enhancer

What effects distort the sound (distortion type)?

  • P-05: Overdrive
  • P-06: Distortion

What effects modulate the sound (modulation type)?

  • P-07: Phaser
  • P-08: Auto Wah
  • P-09: Rotary
  • P-10: Stereo Flanger
  • P-11: Ste Flanger

What effects affect the level (compressor type)?

  • P-14: Compressor
  • P-15: Limiter

What effects broaden the sound (chorus type)?

  • P-16: Hex a Chorus
  • P-17: Tremolo Chorus
  • P-18: Stereo Chorus
  • P-19: Space D
  • P-20: 3D Chorus

What effects reverberate the sound (delay/reverb type)?

  • P-21: Stereo Dela
  • P-22: Modulation Delay
  • P-23: 3 Tap Delay
  • P-24: 4 Ta Dela
  • P-25: Time Ctrl Delay
  • P-26: Reverb
  • P-27: Gate Reverb
  • P-28: 3D Delay

What effects modify the pitch (pitch/shift type)?

  • P-29: 2 Pitch Shifter
  • P-30: Fb Pitch Shifter

What are the other types of effects?

  • P-31: 3D Auto
  • P-32: 3D Manual
  • P-33: Lo-Fi 1
  • P-34: Lo-Fi 2

What are the effects that connect two types of effect in series (series 2)?

  • P-35: OD * Chorus
  • P-36: OD * Flanger
  • P-37: OD * Delay
  • P-38: DS ► Chorus
  • P-39: DS ► Flanger
  • P-40: DS * Delay
  • P-41: EH * Chorus
  • P-42: EH * Flanger
  • P-43: EH * Delay
  • P-44: Chorus ► Delay
  • P-45: Flanger * Dela
  • P-46: Chorus * Flanger

What effects connect three or more types of effect in series (series 3 / series 4 / series 5)?

  • P-47: Rotary Multi
  • P-48: Guitar Multi 1
  • P-49: Guitar Multi 2
  • P-50: Guitar Multi 3
  • P-51: Clean Gt Multi 1
  • P-52: Clean Gt Multi 2
  • P-53: Bass Multi
  • P-54: Rhodes Multi

What are the effect parameters for the Stereo-EQ effect?

  • LOW-MID1-MID2-HI-OUT [LOW]
    • Low Frequency 200Hz/400Hz
    • Low Gain ·12-+5-+12
  • [MID1]
    • Mid1 Freq. 200Hz-1.6kHz-6.3kHz
    • Mid1 Q 0.5/1.012.0/4.019.0
    • Mid1 Gain • 12-tB-t 12
  • [MID2]
    • Mid2 Freq. 200Hz-1kHz-6.3kHz
    • Mid2O 0.5/1 0/2.0/4.0/9.0
    • Mid2 Gain ·12-8-+12
  • [HI]
    • High Frequency 4kHz/8kHz
    • High Gain -12-+12
  • [OUT]
      • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the Spectrum effect?

  • W (1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8}-OUT
  • [W]
    • Band Width 0.5/1.0/2.0/4.0/9.0
  • \
    • Band 1 -12-4-+12
  • \
    • Band2 -12-+1-+12
  • \
    • Band3 ·12-+3-+12
  • \
    • Band 4 -12-+6-+12
  • \
    • Bands ·12-+2-+12
  • \
    • Band6 ·12-1-+12
  • \
    • Band7 ·12-4-+12
  • \
    • Banda -12-5-+12
  • [OUT]
      • Pan L63-0-R63

    • Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the Enhancer effect?

  • ENHANCER-OUTPUT
  • [ENHANCER]
      • Sensitivtty 0-64-127

    • Mix Level 0-127

  • [OUTPUT]
    • Low Gain -12-+3-+12
    • High Gain -12-0-+12
    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the Humanizer effect?

  • DRIVE-VOWEL-OUTPUT
  • [DRIVE]
    • Drive 0-48-127
    • Drive Switch Off/On 00/01
  • [VOWEL]
      • Vowel a/Vule/o 00/01/02/03/04
    • Accel 0-15 ’14
  • [OUTPUT]
    • LGain -12-0-+12
    • HGain -12-0-+ 12
    • Output Pan L63-0-R63

    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the Overdrive effect?

  • OVERDRIVE-AMP-OUTPUT
  • [OVERDRIVE]
      • Drive 0-48-127
  • [AMP]
    • Amp Type Small/Built-In/Double Stack/ 00/01 /02/03 Triple Stack
    • Amp Switch Off/On 00/01
  • [OUTPUT]
    • LGain -12-0-+12
    • HGain -12-0-+12

    • Ou1put Pan L63-0-R63

    • Output Level 0-96-127

What are the effect parameters for the Distortion effect?

  • DISTORTION-AMP-OUTPUT
  • [DISTORTION]
      • Drive 0-76-127
  • [AMP]
    • Amp Type Small/Built-In/Double Stack/ 00/01/02/03 Triple Stack
    • Amp Switch Off/On 00/01
  • [OUTPUT]
    • LGain -12-0·+12
    • HGain -12-8-+12

    • Output Pan L63-0-R63

    • Output Level 0-84-127

What are the effect parameters for the Phaser effect?

  • PHASER-OUTPUT
  • [PHASER]
      • Manual 100Hz-620Hz4!.0kHz ’12

    • Rate 0.05-0.85-10.0 ‘6

    • Depth Q-64-127
    • Resonance 0-16-127
  • [OUTPUT]
    • Mix Level 0-127
    • LGain -12-0-+12
    • HGain -12-0-t 12
    • Output Level 0-104-127

What are the effect parameters for the Auto Wah effect?

  • WAH-MODULATION-OUTPUT
  • [WAH]
    • FilType LPF/BPF 00/01
    • Sens 0-127
      • Manual 0-68-127
    • Peak 0-62-127
  • [MODULATION]

    • Rate 0.05Hz-2.05Hz-10.0Hz ‘6

    • Depth 0-72-127
    • Polarity Down/Up 00/01
  • [OUTPUT]
    • L Gain -12-0-+12
    • H Gain -12-0-+12
    • Output Pan L63-0-R63
    • Output Level 0-96-127

What are the effect parameters for the Rotary effect?

  • LOW-HIGH-SP-OUTPUT
  • [LOW]
    • Slow Rate 0.05Hz-0.35Hz-10.0Hz ‘6
    • Fast Rate 0.05Hz-6.40Hz-1 0.0Hz ‘6
    • Acee! 0-3–15 ’14
    • Level 0-127
  • [HIGH]
    • Slow Rate 0.05Hz-0.90Hz-10.0Hz ‘6
    • Fast Rate 0.05Hz-7.50Hz-10.0Hz ‘6
    • Accel 0-11-15 ’14
    • Level 0-64-127
  • [SP]
    • Separation 0-96-127
      • Speed Slow/Fast 00/7F
  • [OUTPUT]
    • Low Gain ·12-0-+ 12
    • Hi Gain -12-0-+12

    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the Stereo Flanger effect?

  • FIL-FLANGR-OUTPUT
  • [FIL]
    • Pre Filter Type Off/LPF/HPF 00/01/02
    • Cutoff Freq. 250Hz4lkHz ‘9
  • [FLANGR]
    • PreDly 0m-1.6m-100m ·1
    • Depth 0-24-127
      • Rate 0.05-0.60-10.0 ‘6
    • Phase 0-180

    • Feedback Level -98%-+80%-+98%

  • [OUTPUT]
    • Bal Dry100, Effect 0- Dry100, 00-7F Effect100-Dry 0, Effect100
    • LGain -12-0-+12
    • H Gain -12-0-+12
    • Output Level 0-104-127

What are the effect parameters for the Ste Flanger effect?

  • MOD-STEP FLANGER-OUT
  • [MOD]
    • PreDelay Time 0msec-1.0msec-1 00msec ‘1
    • Rate 0.05Hz–0.30Hz-10.0Hz ‘6
    • Depth 0–95–127
  • [STEP FLANGER]
      • Feedback Level -98%-t30%-+98%
    • Phase 0–180

    • Step Rate 0.05Hz-2.75Hz-1 0.0Hz ‘6

  • [OUT]
    • Bal Dry100, Effect 0- Dry100, 00–7F Effecl100-Dry 0, Effect100
    • LGain -12-0-+12
    • H Gain -12-0-+12
    • Output Level 0–96–127

What are the effect parameters for the Tremolo effect?

  • TREMOLO-OUTPUT
  • [TREMOLO]
    • Modulation Wave .,.v,/.n.n/,-v,./.–v,/…,…_ 00/01/02/03/04
      • Modulation Rate 0.05–3.05–10.0 ‘6

    • Modulation Depth 0–96–127

  • [OUTPUT]
    • Low Gain -12-0-+12
    • High Gain -12-0-+12
    • Output Level 0–127

What are the effect parameters for the Auto Pan effect?

  • AUTO PAN-OUTPUT
  • [AUTO PAN]
    • Modulation Wave ,v–…/.n.n./fV"-//v’I/N’–… 00/01/02/03/04
      • Modulation Rate 0.05-3.05-10.0 *6

    • Modulation Depth 0–96–127

  • [OUTPUT]
    • Low Gain -12-0-+12
    • High Gain -12-0-+12
    • Oulput Level 0–127

What are the effect parameters for the Compressor effect?

  • COMPRESSOR-OUTPUT
  • [COMPRESSOR]
    • Attack 0–72-127
    • Sustain 0–100–127
    • Post Gain 0/+6/+12/+18 00/01/02/03
  • [OUTPUT]
    • LGain -12-0-+12
    • HGain -12-0-+12
      • Output Pan L63–0-R63

    • Oulpul Level 0–104-127

What are the effect parameters for the Limiter effect?

  • LIMITER-OUTPUT
  • [LIMITER]
    • Threshold Level Q-85–127
    • Comp.Ratio 1/1.5.1/2, 1/4,1/100 00/01 /02/03
    • Release 0–16–127
    • PostG 0/+6/+ 12/+ 18 00/01 /02/03
  • [OUTPUT]
    • LGain -12-0-+12
    • H Gain -12-0-+12
      • Oulpul Pan L63–0-R63

    • Output Level 0–127

What are the effect parameters for the Hex a Chorus effect?

  • DLY-HEXA CHO-OUTPUT
  • [DLV]
    • Pre Delay Time 0msec-2.4msec-1 00msec ‘1
    • Pre Delay Deviation 0–5–20
  • [OUTPUT]
    • Low Gain -12-0-+12
  • [HEXACHO]
      • Rate 0.05–0.45–10.0 ‘6
    • Depth 0–127
    • Depth Deviation -20-+2-+20
    • Pan Deviation 0–16–20
  • [OUTPUT]

    • Bal Dry100, Effect O–Dry100, 00–7F Effect100-Dry 0, Effect100

    • LGain -12-0-+12
    • H Gain -12-0-+12
    • Output Level 0–112-127

What are the effect parameters for the Tremolo Chorus effect?

  • CHORUS-TREMOLO-OUTPUT
  • [CHORUS]
    • PreDelay Time 0msec-1.6msec-1 00msec ‘1
    • Chorus Rate 0.05Hz–0.45Hz-10.0Hz ‘6
    • Chorus Depth 0–40–127
  • [TREMOLO]
    • T rernolo Phase Q-80–180
      • Tremolo Rate 0.05Hz-3.05Hz-1 0.0Hz ‘6
    • T remoloSeparation 0–96–127
  • [OUTPUT]

    • Bal Dry100, Effecl 0–Dry 0, 00–7F Effect100

    • LGain -12-0-+12
    • HGain -12-0-+12
    • Outpul Level 0–127

What are the effect parameters for the Stereo Chorus effect?

  • FIL-CHORUS-OUTPUT
  • [FIi]
    • Pre Filter Type Off/LPF/HPF 00/01102
    • Cutoff Frequency 250Hz-8kHz ‘9
  • [CHORUS)
    • Pre Delay Time 0sec-1.0msec-1 00msec ‘1
      • Rate 0.05Hz-0.45Hz-1 0.0Hz ‘6
    • Depth 0-111-127
    • Phase 0-180
  • [OUTPUT]

    • Bal Dry 0, Effect100-Dry100, 00-7F Effect100-Dry100, Effect 0

    • LGain -12–0-+12
    • HGain -12–0-+ 12
    • Output Level 0-104-127

What are the effect parameters for the Space D effect?

  • SPACE O-OUTPUT
  • [SPACE DJ]
    • PreDelay Time 0msec-3.2msec-1 00msec ‘1
      • Rate 0.05Hz-0.45Hz-10.0Hz ‘6
    • Depth 0-127
    • Phase 0-180
  • [OUTPUT]

    • Bal Dry100, Effect 0-Dry100, 00-7F Effect100-Dry 0, Eflect100

    • LGain ·12–0-+ 12
    • H Gain • 12–0-+ 12
    • Output Level 0-96-127

What are the effect parameters for the 3D Chorus effect?

  • 3D CHORUS-OUTPUT
  • [3D CHORUS]
    • PreDelay Time 0msec-1.0msec-1 OOmsec ‘1
      • Rate 0.05-0.45-10.0 ‘6
    • Depth 0-72-127
    • Output Mode Speaker/Phones 00/01
  • [OUTPUT]

    • Bal Dry100, Effect O-Dry100, 00-7F Effect100-Dry 0, Effect100

    • LGain ·12–0-+ 12
    • H Gain ·12–0-+12
    • Output Level 0-80-127

What are the effect parameters for the Stereo Dela effect?

  • DELA Y-FB-OUTPUT
  • [DELAY]
    • TimeL 0m-150m-500m ‘4
    • TimeR 0m-300m-500m ‘4
    • Phase L Norm/Invert 00/01
    • Phase R Norm/Invert
  • [FB]
      • Feedback Level ·98%-+48%-+98%
    • Feedback Mode Norm/Cross 00/01
    • HF Damp 315Hz-8kHz/Bypass ‘8
  • [OUTPUT]

    • Bal Dry100, Effect O-Dry100, 00-7F Effect 74-Dry 0. Effect100

    • LGain ·12-0-+12
    • H Gain • 12–0-+ 12
    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the Modulation Delay effect?

  • TIME-FB-MOD•OUTPUT
  • [TIME]
    • Delay Time L 0msec-40msec-500msec ‘4
    • Delay Time R 0msec-220msec-500msec ‘4
  • [FBJ]
    • Feedback Level -98%-+48%-+98%
    • Feedback Mode Norm/Cross 00/01
    • HF Damp 315Hz-8kHz/Bypass ‘8
  • [MOD]
      • Modulation Rate 0.05-0.65-10.0 ‘6
    • Modulation Depth 0-21-127
    • Modulation Phase 0-180
  • [OUTPUT]

    • Bal Dry100, Effect O-Dry100, 00-7F Effect 61-Dry 0, Effect100

    • LGain ·12–0-+12
    • HGain ·12–0-+12
    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the 3 Tap Delay effect?

  • TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT
  • [TIME]
    • Delay TimeCenter 200ms-300ms-990ms/1 sec ‘2
    • Delay Time Left 200ms-990ms/1 sec ·2
    • Delay Time Right 200ms-235ms-990ms/1 sec ·2
  • [LEVEL]
    • Delay LevelCenter 0-127
    • Delay Level Left 0-127
    • Delay Level Right 0-127
  • [FB]
      • Feedback Level -98%-+32%-+98%
    • HF Damp 315Hz-8kHz/Bypass ·a
  • [OUTPUT]

    • Bal Dry100, Effect O-Dry100, 00-7F Effect74-Dry 0. Effect100

    • LGain ·12–0-+12
    • H Gain ·12–0-+ 12
    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the 4 Ta Dela effect?

  • TIME-LEVEL-FB-OUTPUT
  • [TIME]
    • Time1 200m-500m-990m/1 sec ‘2
    • Time2 200m-300m-990m/1 sec ·2
    • Time3 200m-400m-990m/1 sec ‘2
    • Time4 200m-990m/1 sec ‘2
  • [LEVEL]
    • Level 1 0-127
    • Level 2 0-127
    • Level 3 0-127
    • Level 4 0-127
  • [FB]
      • Feedback Level -98%-+32%-+98%
    • HF Damp 315Hz-8kHz/Bypass ‘8
  • [OUTPUT]

    • Bal Dry100, Effect O-Dry100, 00-7F Effect 74-Dry 0, Effect100

    • LGain -12–0-+12
    • HGain -12–0-+12
    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the Time Ctrl Delay effect?

  • TC DL Y-FB-OUTPUT
  • [TC DLV]
      • DelayTime 200msec-500msec-990msed1 sec ‘3
    • Acceleration 0-10-15 ’14
    • Effect Pan L63-0-R63
  • [FBJ]

    • Feedback level -98%-+32%-+98%

    • HF Damp 315Hz-8kHz/Bypass ·s
  • [OUTPUT]
    • Bal Dry100, Effect O-Dry100, 00-7F Effect 74-Dry o, Effect100
    • LGain -12–0-+12
    • H Gain -12–0-+12
    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the Reverb effect?

  • REVERB•OUTPUT
  • [REVERS]
    • Type Room 1 /2/Stage 1 /2/Hall 1/2 00/01 /02/03/04/05
      • Time 0-120-127
    • PreDelay Time 0msec-74msec-1 OOmsec ‘1
    • HF Damp 315Hz-6.3kHz-8kHz/Bypass ‘8
  • [OUTPUT]

    • Bal Dry100, Effect O-Dry100, 00-7F Effect100-Dry 0, Effect100

    • LGain -12–0-+12
    • H Gain -12–0-+12
    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the Gate Reverb effect?

  • GATE REVERS-OUTPUT
  • [GATE REERB]
    • Reverb Type Norm/Reverse/Sweep1/2 00/01 /02/03
    • PreDelay Time 0msec-0.5msec-100msec ‘1
    • Gate Time 5msec-65msec-500msec
  • [OUTPUT]
      • Bal Dry100, Effect 0· Dry100, 00-7F Effect 65-Dry 0, Effecl100
    • LGain -12–0-+12
    • HGain -12-3-+12

    • Output Level 0-112-127

What are the effect parameters for the 3D Delay effect?

  • TIME-LEVEL-FB-MODE-OUT
  • [TIME]
    • Delay TimeCenter Oms-300ms-500ms ‘4
    • Delay Time Left Oms-200ms-500ms ‘4
    • Delay Time Right 0ms-240ms-500ms •4
  • [LEVEL]
    • Delay LevelCenter 0-40-127
    • Delay Level Left 0-64-127
    • Delay Level Right 0-64-127
  • [FB]
      • Feedback Level -98%-+32%-t98%
    • HF Damp 315Hz-8kHz/Bypass ‘8
  • [MODE]
    • Output Mode Speaker/Phones 00/01
  • [OUT]

    • Bal Dry100, Effect O-Dry100, 00-7F Effect 74-Dry 0, Effect100

    • LGain -12–0-+12
    • HGain -12–0-+12
    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the 2 Pitch Shifter effect?

  • PITCH-DL Y-PAN-BAL-OUT
  • [PITCH]
      • Coarse 1 -24-+7-t 12

    • Coarse 2 -24-5-+12

    • Fine1 -1OD-4-t100
    • Fine2 -1 0o-+4-t 100
  • [DLV]
    • PreDelay Time 1 0ms-100ms ‘1
    • PreDelay Time 2 0ms-100ms ‘1
    • Pttch Shifter Mode 1-3-5
  • [PAN]
    • Effect OutputPan1 L63-0-R63
    • Effect OutputPan2 L63-0-R63
  • [BAL]
    • Level Balance A> 0B-A=B-A 0<B
  • [OUT]
    • Bal Dry100, Effect 0- Dry100, 00-7F Effect 74-Dry O, Effect100
    • LGain -12-0–+12
    • HGain -12-0–+12
    • Output Level 0-95-127

What are the effect parameters for the Fb Pitch Shifter effect?

  • PITCH-DL Y-FB-PAN-OUT
  • [PITCH]
      • Coarse Pitch -24-+7–+ 12
    • Fine Pitch -100-Q–+ 100
  • [DLV]
    • Pre Delay Time Omsec-45msec-1 OOmsec ·1
    • Pitch Shift Mode 1–3-5
  • [FB]

    • Feedback Level ·98%-+40°/o–+98%

  • [PAN]
    • Effect Output Pan L63-0–R63
  • [OUT]
    • Bal Dry100, Effect O-Dry100, 00-7F Effect100-Dry o, Elfect100
    • LGain ·12-Q–+12
    • H Gain ·12-6-+12
    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the 3D Auto effect?

  • ROTATION-OUTPUT
  • Azimuth 180/L 168-0–R168 ’13
    • Speed 0.05Hz-1.30Hz-10.0Hz ‘6
  • Clockwise ·/+ 00/01

  • Turn Off/On 00/01

  • [OUTPUT]
    • Output Mode Speaker/Phones 00/01
    • Output Level 0-127

What are the effect parameters for the 3D Manual effect?

  • AZIMUTH-OUTPUT
  • [AZIMUTH]
      • Azimuth 180/L168-0–R 168 ’13
  • [OUTPUT]
    • Output Mode Speaker/Phones 00/01

    • Output Level 0-12

What is the value (H) for the Sw Off/On parameters in the Multi-Effects List?

00/01

What is the Output Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [OUTPUT] parameter?

0-127

What is the value (H) for the Output Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [OUTPUT] parameter?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Output Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [OUTPUT] parameter?

16

What is the P-55 parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Keyboard Multi

What is the value for the P-55 parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

05 00

What is the P-57 parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Flanger, Delay

What is the value for the P-57 parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

11 01

What is the Modulation Freq in the Multi-Effects List for the [RM] parameter?

0-50-127

What is the value (H) for the Modulation Freq in the Multi-Effects List for the [RM] parameter?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Modulation Freq in the Multi-Effects List for the [RM] parameter?

03

What is the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [FLANGER] parameter?

0msec-1.Gmsec-1

What is the value for the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [FLANGER] parameter?

00msec ‘1

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [FLANGER] parameter?

03

What is the +Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Dry100, RingM O-Dry100, RingM 30-Dry 0, RingM100

What is the value (H) for the +Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the +Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

04

What is the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

0.05Hz-0.60Hz-1

What is the value for the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

0.0Hz ‘6

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

04

What is the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

0-24-127

What is the value (H) for the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

05

What is the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [EQ] parameter?

-98%-+80%-+98%

What is the value (H) for the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [EQ] parameter?

0F-71

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [EQ] parameter?

06

What is the LGain in the Multi-Effects List?

-12-+3-+12

What is the value (H) for the LGain in the Multi-Effects List?

34-4C

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the LGain in the Multi-Effects List?

05

What is the +Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Dry100, Finger O-Dry100, Flnger100-Dry 0, Flnger100

What is the value (H) for the +Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the +Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

07

What is the HGain in the Multi-Effects List?

·12-3-+12

What is the value (H) for the HGain in the Multi-Effects List?

34-4C

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the HGain in the Multi-Effects List?

09

What is the Mid Frequency in the Multi-Effects List?

200Hz-6.3kHz ’10

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Mid Frequency in the Multi-Effects List?

06

What is the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

L63-0-R63

What is the value (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

12

What is the MidQ in the Multi-Effects List?

0.5/1.0/2.0/4.0/9.0

What is the value (H) for the MidQ in the Multi-Effects List?

00/01/02/03/04

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the MidQ in the Multi-Effects List?

07

What is the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

0-127

What is the value (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

13

What is the MidGain in the Multi-Effects List?

·12-+5-+12

What is the value (H) for the MidGain in the Multi-Effects List?

34-4C

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the MidGain in the Multi-Effects List?

08

What is the Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [TIME] parameter?

0msec-250mec-500msec ‘4

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [TIME] parameter?

08

What is the Coarse in the Multi-Effects List?

·24-+7-+12

What is the value (H) for the Coarse in the Multi-Effects List?

28-4C

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Coarse in the Multi-Effects List?

0A

What is the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List?

-98%-+32%-+98%

What is the value (H) for the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List?

0F-71

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List?

09

What is the Fine in the Multi-Effects List?

• 100-0-+ 100

What is the value (H) for the Fine in the Multi-Effects List?

0E-72

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Fine in the Multi-Effects List?

OB

What is the HF Damp in the Multi-Effects List?

315Hz-8kHz/Bypass ‘8

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the HF Damp in the Multi-Effects List?

0A

What is the Pilch Shift Mode in the Multi-Effects List?

1-5

What is the value (H) for the Pilch Shift Mode in the Multi-Effects List?

00-04

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Pilch Shift Mode in the Multi-Effects List?

oc

What is the # Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Dry100, Delay O-Dry100, Delay 7 4-Dry 0, Delay100

What is the value (H) for the # Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the # Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

oc

What is the Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Dry100, PitchS O-Dry100, PitchS 60-Dry 0, PitchS100

What is the value (H) for the Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

OD

What is the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

L63-0-R63

What is the value (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

14

What is the Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [PH] parameter?

0-127

What is the value (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [PH] parameter?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [PH] parameter?

15

What is the Manual in the Multi-Effects List?

1 00Hz-620Hz-8.0kHz ’12

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Manual in the Multi-Effects List?

OE

What is the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

0.05–0.45-6.40 •7

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

OF

What is the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

0-90-127

What is the value (H) for the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

10

What is the Reso in the Multi-Effects List?

D-80-127

What is the value (H) for the Reso in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Reso in the Multi-Effects List?

11

What is the Mix in the Multi-Effects List?

0-75-127

What is the value (H) for the Mix in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Mix in the Multi-Effects List?

12

What is the P-58 parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Chorus, Flanger

What is the value for the P-58 parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

11 02

What is the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [CHORUS] parameter?

0sec-1.6msec-1

What is the value for the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [CHORUS] parameter?

00msec ‘1

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [CHORUS] parameter?

03

What is the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

0.05Hz-0.45Hz-1

What is the value for the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

0.0Hz ‘6

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

04

What is the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

0-120-127

What is the value (H) for the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

05

What is the + Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Dry100 ,Chorus O-Dry100 , Chorus100 -Dry 0 ,Chorus100

What is the value (H) for the + Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the + Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

07

What is the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

L63-0-R63

What is the value (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

12

What is the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

0-127

What is the value (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

13

What is the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [FLANGER] parameter?

0msec-1.6msec-1

What is the value for the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [FLANGER] parameter?

00msec ‘1

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [FLANGER] parameter?

08

What is the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

0.05Hz-0.60Hz-1

What is the value for the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

0.0Hz ‘6

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

09

What is the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

0-24-127

What is the value (H) for the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

DA

What is the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List?

-98%-+80%-+98%

What is the value (H) for the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List?

0F-71

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List?

OB

What is the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [CHORUS] parameter?

0msec-1. 0msec-1

What is the value for the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [CHORUS] parameter?

00msec ‘1

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the PreDelay Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [CHORUS] parameter?

03

What is the # FL Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Dry100, Finger O-Dry100, Flnger100 -Dry 0, Flnger100

What is the value (H) for the # FL Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the # FL Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

oc

What is the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

0.05Hz-0.45Hz-1

What is the value for the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

0.0Hz ‘6

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Rate in the Multi-Effects List?

04

What is the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

0-120-127

What is the value (H) for the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Depth in the Multi-Effects List?

05

What is the + Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Dry100, Chorus O-Dry100, Chorus100-Dry o, Chorus100

What is the value (H) for the + Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the + Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

07

What is the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

L63-0-R63

What is the value (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

12

What is the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

0-127

What is the value (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

13

What is the Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [DELAY] parameter?

0msec-250msec-500msec ‘4

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Time in the Multi-Effects List for the [DELAY] parameter?

08

What is the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List?

-98%-+32%-+98%

What is the value (H) for the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List?

0F-71

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Feedback Level in the Multi-Effects List?

09

What is the HF Damp in the Multi-Effects List?

315Hz-8kHz/Bypass ·a

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the HF Damp in the Multi-Effects List?

0A

What is the OD1 Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD1] parameter?

Odrv/Dist

What is the value (H) for the OD1 Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD1] parameter?

00/01

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the OD1 Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD1] parameter?

03

What is the + Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

0-48-127

What is the value (H) for the + Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the + Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

04

What is the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

Small/Bltln/2-Sll<i3-Stk

What is the value (H) for the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

00/01 /02/03

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

05

What is the AmpSw in the Multi-Effects List?

Off/On

What is the value (H) for the AmpSw in the Multi-Effects List?

00/01

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the AmpSw in the Multi-Effects List?

06

What is the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

L63-0-R63

What is the value (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

12

What is the # Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

Dry100, Delay O-Dry100, Delay 61-Dry 0, Delay100

What is the value (H) for the # Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the # Bal parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

oc

What is the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

L63-0-R63

What is the value (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

14

What is the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

0-96-127

What is the value (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

13

What is the OD2 Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD2] parameter?

Odrv/Dlst

What is the value (H) for the OD2 Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD2] parameter?

0Q/01

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the OD2 Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD2] parameter?

08

What is the # Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

0-76-127

What is the value (H) for the # Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the # Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

09

What is the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

SmalVBuiitln/2-Stk/3·Slk

What is the value (H) for the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

OQ/01/02103

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

0A

What is the AmpSw in the Multi-Effects List?

Off/On

What is the value (H) for the AmpSw in the Multi-Effects List?

00/01

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the AmpSw in the Multi-Effects List?

OB

What is the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

L63–0-R63

What is the value (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

14

What is the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

l}-84-127

What is the value (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

15

What is the Output Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [OUTPUT000] parameter?

0-127

What is the value (H) for the Output Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [OUTPUT000] parameter?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Output Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [OUTPUT000] parameter?

16

What is the P-60 parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

OD/DS, Rotary

What is the value for the P-60 parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

11 04

What is the OD Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD] parameter?

Odrv/Dist

What is the value (H) for the OD Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD] parameter?

00/01

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the OD Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD] parameter?

03

What is the + Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

D-48-127

What is the value (H) for the + Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the + Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

04

What is the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

Small/Bitln/2-Stk/3-Stk

What is the value (H) for the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

00/01/02103

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

05

What is the AmpSw in the Multi-Effects List?

Off/On

What is the value (H) for the AmpSw in the Multi-Effects List?

00/01

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the AmpSw in the Multi-Effects List?

06

What is the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

L63-0-R63

What is the value (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

12

What is the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

0-96-127

What is the value (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

13

What is the Slow Rate in the Multi-Effects List for the [RTL] parameter?

0.05Hz-0.35Hz-10.0Hz ‘6

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Slow Rate in the Multi-Effects List for the [RTL] parameter?

08

What is the Fast Rate in the Multi-Effects List for the [RTL] parameter?

0.05Hz-6.40Hz -10.0Hz ‘6

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Fast Rate in the Multi-Effects List for the [RTL] parameter?

09

What is the Accel in the Multi-Effects List for the [RTL] parameter?

0-3-15 ’14

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Accel in the Multi-Effects List for the [RTL] parameter?

0A

What is the Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [RTL] parameter?

0-127

What is the value (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [RTL] parameter?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [RTL] parameter?

OB

What is the Slow Rate in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT H] parameter?

0.05Hz-0.90Hz-10.0Hz ‘6

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Slow Rate in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT H] parameter?

0C

What is the Fast Rate in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT H] parameter?

0.05Hz-7.50Hz-10.0Hz ‘6

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Fast Rate in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT H] parameter?

OD

What is the Accel in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT H] parameter?

0-11-15 ’14

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Accel in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT H] parameter?

OE

What is the Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT H] parameter?

D-64-127

What is the value (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT H] parameter?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT H] parameter?

OF

What is the Separation in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT] parameter?

0-96-127

What is the value (H) for the Separation in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT] parameter?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Separation in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT] parameter?

10

What is the # Speed in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT] parameter?

Slow/Fast

What is the value (H) for the # Speed in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT] parameter?

00/7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the # Speed in the Multi-Effects List for the [RT] parameter?

11

What is the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

L63-0-R63

What is the value (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Pan in the Multi-Effects List?

14

What is the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

0-127

What is the value (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Level in the Multi-Effects List?

15

What is the Output Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [OUT] parameter?

0-127

What is the value (H) for the Output Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [OUT] parameter?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Output Level in the Multi-Effects List for the [OUT] parameter?

16

What is the P-61 parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

O0/DS, Phaser

What is the value for the P-61 parameter setting in the Multi-Effects List?

11 05

What is the OD Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD] parameter?

Odrv/Dist

What is the value (H) for the OD Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD] parameter?

00/01

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the OD Select in the Multi-Effects List for the [OD] parameter?

03

What is the + Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

D-48-127

What is the value (H) for the + Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

00-7F

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the + Drive in the Multi-Effects List?

04

What is the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

Small/Bltln/2-Stk/3-Stk

What is the value (H) for the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

00101102/03

What is the MSB/LSB (H) for the Amp in the Multi-Effects List?

05

What is the AmpSw in the Multi-Effects List?

Off/On

What are these functions and parameters marked by?

These functions and parameters are marked by an {880} symbol.

If MIDI messages marked by an {880} symbol are transmitted to another GS format sound module or to the SC-88/88Pro, will these messages be recognized?

No, these messages will not be recognized.

What are the functions and messages which were added to the SC-88 (and not found on previous GS format sound modules) marked by?

They are marked by an {88} symbol.

What are the functions and parameters which were added to the SC-88Pro (and not found on the SC-88) marked by?

They are marked by a {Pro} symbol.

When are Note off Status messages received for Rhythm Parts?

These messages are received when Rx.NOTE OFF = ON for each Rhythm Tone.

Are the velocity values of Note Off messages ignored?

Yes.

When are Note on Status messages not received?

Note on Status messages are not received when Rx.NOTE MESSAGE =OFF. (Initial value is ON).

When are Note on Status messages not received for Rhythm Parts?

They are not received when Rx.NOTE ON= OFF for each Rhythm Tone.

When is Polyphonic Key Pressure not received?

It is not received when Rx.POLY PRESSURE (PA6)= OFF. (Initial value is ON).

How is the resulting effect of Polyphonic Key Pressure determined?

The resulting effect is determined by System Exclusive messages.

Will there be an effect with the initial settings for Polyphonic Key Pressure?

No, there will be no effect.

When are all control change messages except for Channel Mode messages ignored?

When Rx.CONTROL CHANGE = OFF.

Will the value specified by a Control Change message be reset by a Program Change?

No.

When is Bank Select not received?

Bank Select is not received when Rx.BANK SELECT= OFF.

What is “Rx.BANK SELECT” set to OFF by?

It is set to OFF by “Turn General MIDI System On”.

What is “Rx.BANK SELECT” set to ON by?

It is set to ON by “GS RESET”.

What is the power-on default value for “Rx.BANK SELECT”?

ON.

When BANK SELECT LSB = OFF, how will Bank number LSB be handled?

Bank number LSB will be handled as 00H regardless of the received value.

When sending Bank Select messages, what do you have to send?

You have to send both the MSB (mmH) and LSB (llH, the value should be 00H) together.

When will Bank Select processing be suspended?

Bank Select processing will be suspended until a Program Change message is received.

What is the GS format “Variation number”?

It is the value of the Bank Select MSB (Controller number 0) expressed in decimal.

What does the SC-880 receive to switch the Tone Set?

It receives the lower byte of the Bank Select message (control number 32).

When the lower byte of the Bank Select message is 00H, what will be selected?

The Tone Set specified in Tone mode will be selected.

What will a lower byte of 01H select?

Tone Set 1.

What will a lower byte of 02H select?

Tone Set 2.

What will a lower byte of 03H select?

Tone Set 3.

Do some other GS devices recognize the Bank Select LSB (Controller number 32)?

No.

What does the SC-880 receive to select Patches or Performances?

It receives the upper byte of the Bank Select message and the Program Change.

When is Bank Select not received?

Not received when Control Channel= OFF.

What is the initial value for Control Channel?

OFF.

What Patch will change in the case of PC# by itself?

The Patch of the currently selected type (Preset, User) will change.

What Performance will change in the case of PC# by itself?

The Performance of the currently selected type (Preset, User) will change.

When is Modulation not received?

It is not received when Rx.MODULATION= OFF.

What is the initial value for Modulation?

ON.

With the initial settings, what is the resulting effect of Modulation?

Pitch Modulation Depth.

What does Portamento Time adjust?

It adjusts the rate of pitch change when Portamento is ON or when using the Portamento Control.

What does a Portamento Time value of 0 result in?

The fastest change.

What are mm and ll in Data Entry?

mm = MSB. ll = LSB.

What are Volume messages used to adjust?

The volume balance of each Part.

When are Volume messages not received?

When Rx.VOLUME= OFF.

What is the initial value for Volume?

64H (100).

For Rhythm Parts, what is Pan a relative adjustment of?

Each Rhythm Tone’s pan setting.

When is Pan not received?

When Rx.PANPOT = OFF.

What is the initial value for Pan?

ON.

What does Expression adjust?

It adjusts the volume of a Part.

Can Expression be used independently from Volume messages?

Yes.

What are Expression messages used for?

Musical expression within a performance; e.g., expression pedal movements, crescendo and decrescendo.

When is Expression not received?

When Rx.EXPRESSION= OFF.

What is the initial value for Expression?

ON.

When is Hold 1 not received?

When Rx.HOLD I= OFF.

What is the initial value for Hold 1?

ON.

When is Portamento not received?

When Rx.PORTAMENTO =OFF.

What is the initial value for Portamento?

ON.

What control values correspond to OFF and ON for Portamento?

0-63 = OFF, 64-127 = ON.

When is Sostenuto not received?

When Rx.SOSTENUTO = OFF.

What is the initial value for Sostenuto?

ON.

What control values correspond to OFF and ON for Sostenuto?

0-63 = OFF, 64-127 = ON.

When is Soft not received?

When Rx.SOFT = OFF.

What is the initial value for Soft?

ON.

What control values correspond to OFF and ON for Soft?

0-63 = OFF, 64-127 = ON.

What will a Note-on received immediately after a Portamento Control message do?

It will change continuously in pitch, starting from the pitch of the Source Note Number.

If a voice is already sounding for a note number identical to the Source Note Number, what will happen to this voice when the next Note-on is received?

This voice will continue sounding (i.e., legato) and will, when the next Note-on is received, smoothly change to the pitch of that Note-on.

What is the rate of the pitch change caused by Portamento Control determined by?

The Portamento Time value.

What does Effect 1 adjust?

The Reverb Send Level of each Part.

What does Effect 3 adjust?

The Chorus Send Level of each Part.

What does Effect 4 adjust?

The Delay Send Level of each Part.

Might some other GS devices not recognize Effect 4?

Yes.

Can Delay be used in MODE-2 (Double Module mode)?

No.

When can NRPN be received?

When Rx.NRPN = ON.

What is “Rx.NRPN” set to OFF by?

Power-on reset or by receiving “Turn General MIDI System On”.

What is it set to ON by?

“GS RESET”.

Will the value set by NRPN be reset even if Program Change or Reset All Controllers is received?

No.

What does the NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) message allow?

An extended range of control changes to be used.

What can NRPN messages be used to modify on the SC-880?

Tone parameters, etc.

To use NRPN messages, what must you first do?

Use NRPN messages (Controller number 98 and 99, their order does not matter) to specify the parameter to be controlled, and then use Data Entry messages to specify the value of the specified parameter.

Once an NRPN parameter has been specified, what will all Data Entry messages received on that channel modify?

The value of that parameter.

To prevent accidents, what is it recommended that you set?

RPN Null (RPN Number= 7FH/7FH) when you have finished setting the value of the desired parameter.

On the SC-880, is Data entry LSB (Controller number 38) of NRPN ignored?

Yes.

Is it a problem to send Data entry MSB (Controller number 6) only (without Data entry LSB)?

No.

How will “relative change” parameters change?

Relative to the preset value (40H).

May “relative change” parameters sometimes differ in the way the sound changes or in the range of change, even among different GS devices?

Yes.

How will parameters marked “absolute change” be set?

To the absolute value of the parameter, regardless of the preset value.

Is it possible to simultaneously use both Chorus Send Level and Delay Send Level on a single Rhythm Tone?

No.

When is RPN not received?

When Rx.RPN = OFF.

What is the initial value for RPN?

ON.

Will the value specified by RPN be reset even by messages such as Program Change or Reset All Controller?

No.

What are the RPN (Registered Parameter Number) messages?

Expanded control changes.

How is each function of an RPN described?

By the MIDI Standard.

To use RPN messages, what must you first do?

Use RPN (Controller number 100 and 101, their order does not matter) to specify the parameter to be controlled, and then use Data Entry messages (Controller number 6, 38) to specify the value of the specified parameter.

Once an RPN parameter has been specified, what will all Data Entry messages received on that channel modify?

The value of that parameter.

To prevent accidents, what is it recommended that you set?

RPN Null (RPN Number = 7FH/7FH) when you have finished setting the value of the desired parameter.

What does Master Fine Tuning specify?

Up to 2 octaves in semitone steps.

What does RPN null set?

Condition where RPN and NRPN are unspecified.

Will the data entry messages after set RPN null be ignored?

Yes.

(No Data entry messages are required after RPN null)

Settings already made will not change.

When is Program Change not received?

When Rx.PROGRAM CHANGE= OFF.

What is the initial value for Program Change?

ON.

After a Program Change message is received, when will the sound change?

Beginning with the next Note-on.

Will voices already sounding when the Program Change message was received be affected?

No.

For Rhythm Parts, when will Program Change message not be received?

On lower byte of the bank numbers (the value of Control Number 0 is other than 0 (00H)).

When is Channel Pressure not received?

When Rx.CH PRESSURE (CA6)= OFF.

What is the initial value for Channel Pressure?

ON.

How is the resulting effect of Channel Pressure determined?

By System Exclusive messages.

Will there be an effect with the initial settings for Channel Pressure?

No.

When is Pitch Bend Change not received?

When Rx.PITCH BEND= OFF.

What is the initial value for Pitch Bend Change?

ON.

How is the resulting effect of Pitch Bend Change determined?

By System Exclusive messages.

With the initial settings, what is the effect of Pitch Bend Change?

Pitch Bend.

When this message is received, what will happen to all currently-sounding notes on the corresponding channel?

They will be turned off immediately.

When a Reset All Controllers message is received, what will happen to the following controllers?

They will be set to their reset values.

What will happen when All Notes Off is received?

All notes on the corresponding channel will be turned off.

However if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is ON, what will happen to the sound?

The sound will be continued until these are turned off.

What will the SC-880 do when it receives Active Sensing?

When Active Sensing is received, the SC-880 will begin monitoring the intervals of all further messages. While monitoring, if the interval between messages exceeds 420 ms, the same processing will be carried out as when All Sounds Off, All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers are received, and message interval monitoring will be halted.

What is the format for System Exclusive Messages?

Status: F7H Data byte: F0H iiH, ddH, … , eeH F7H F0H: System Exclusive Message status. ii = ID number: an ID number (manufacturer ID) to indicate the manufacturer whose Exclusive message this is. dd, … ,ee: data. F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

What is Roland’s manufacturer ID?

Roland’s manufacturer ID is 41H.

What are the ID numbers for Universal Non-realtime Messages and Universal Realtime Messages?

ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard; Universal Non-realtime Messages (7EH) and Universal Realtime Messages (7FH).

What System Exclusive Messages are received by the SC-880?

The System Exclusive Messages received by the SC-880 are:

  • messages related to mode settings,
  • Universal Realtime System Exclusive messages,
  • Data Requests (RQ1), and
  • Data Set (DT1).

What are the messages related to mode settings used for?

These messages are used to:

  • initialize a device to GS or General MIDI mode, or
  • change the operating mode.

What is recommended when creating performance data?

When creating performance data:

  • a “Turn General MIDI System On” message should be inserted at the beginning of a General MIDI score, and
  • a “GS Reset” message at the beginning of a music file for GS.

What is recommended for music files for the SC-88 and for the SC-880?

It is recommended that “System Mode Set” be placed at the beginning of each music file. Each song should contain only one mode message as appropriate for the type of data.

How many mode setting messages should be inserted in a single song?

Do not insert two or more mode setting messages in a single song.

What format does “Turn General MIDI System On” use?

“Turn General MIDI System On” uses Universal Non-realtime Message format.

What format do “System Mode Set” and “GS Reset” use?

“System Mode Set” and “GS Reset” use Roland system exclusive format “Data Set 1 (DT1).”

What is the Turn General MIDI System On command?

This is a command message that resets the internal settings of the unit to the General MIDI initial state (General MIDI System-Level 1).

What happens after the SC-880 receives the Turn General MIDI System On command?

After receiving this message, the SC-880 will automatically be set to the proper condition for correctly playing a General MIDI score.

What is the format for the Turn General MIDI System On command?

Status: F0H 7EH F7H Data byte: F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 7EH: ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message) 7FH: Device ID (Broadcast) 09H: Sub ID#1 (General MIDI Message) 01H: Sub ID#2 (General MIDI On) F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

What happens when the Turn General MIDI System On message is received?

When this message is received, Rx.BANK SELECT will be OFF and Rx.NRPN will be OFF.

When will the Turn General MIDI System On message not be received?

This message will not be received when Rx GM On = OFF.

What is the minimum interval that must be between the Turn General MIDI System On message and the next message?

There must be an interval of at least 50 ms between this message and the next message.

What is the GS Reset command?

GS Reset is a command message that resets the internal settings of a device to the GS initial state. This message appears at the beginning of music file for GS, and a GS device that receives this message will automatically be set to the proper state to correctly play back music file for GS.

What will be initialized if the SC-880 is in MODE-1 (single module mode)?

If the SC-880 is in MODE-1 (single module mode), all 32 Parts will be initialized.

What will be initialized if the SC-880 is in MODE-2 (double module mode)?

If the SC-880 is in MODE-2 (double module mode), only the corresponding 16 Parts will be initialized.

What may affect playback from the other MIDI connector when the receiving MIDI connector for each Part has been changed in MODE-2?

In MODE-2, if the receiving MIDI connector for each Part has been changed, this may affect playback from the other MIDI connector.

What should be done before using the GS Reset command if the receiving MIDI connector for each Part has been changed in MODE-2?

In this case, first perform initialization before using this command.

What is the format of the GS Reset command?

Status: F0H 41H F7H Data byte: F0H, 41H, dev, 42H, 12H, 40H, 00H, 7FH, 00H, 41H, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 41H: ID number (Roland) dev: Device ID (dev: OOH-lFH (1-32), Initial value is 10H (17)) 42H: Model ID (GS) 12H: Command ID (DT1) 40H: Address MSB 00H: Address 7FH: Address LSB 00H: Data (GS reset) 41H: Checksum F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

What will happen when the GS Reset message is received?

When this message is received, Rx.NRPN will be ON.

When will the GS Reset message not be received?

This message will not be received if “Rx GS Reset = OFF”.

What is the minimum interval that must be between the GS Reset message and the next message?

There must be an interval of at least 50 ms between this message and the next.

What is the System Mode Set message?

System Mode Set is a message that sets the SC-880 operating mode to MODE-1 (single module mode) or MODE-2 (double module mode).

What happens when the System Mode Set message is received?

When this message is received, the operating mode will be set, and at the same time all internal parameters (except for the tone set settings of each Part) will be reset to the initial state.

What is the format of the System Mode Set message?

Status: F0H 41H F7H Data byte: 41H, dev, 42H, 12H, 00H, 00H, 7FH, ddH, sumH, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 41H: ID number (Roland) dev: Device ID (dev: OOH-lFH (1-32), Initial value is 10H (17)) 42H: Model ID (GS) 12H: Command ID (DT1) 00H: Address MSB 00H: Address 7FH: Address LSB ddH: Data * 00H: MODE-1 * 01H: MODE-2 sumH: Checksum * 01H: MODE-1 * 00H: MODE-2 F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

When will the System Mode Set message not be received?

This message will not be received when Rx GS Reset = OFF or Rx Module Mode = OFF.

What is the minimum interval that must be between the System Mode Set message and the next message?

There must be an interval of at least 50 ms between this message and the next.

What is the format for the Master Volume Universal Realtime System Exclusive Message?

Status: F0H 7FH F7H Data byte: F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, llH, mmH, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 7FH: ID number (universal realtime message) 7FH: Device ID (Broadcast) 04H: Sub ID#1 (Device Control messages) 01H: Sub ID#2 (Master Volume) llH: Master volume lower byte mmH: Master volume upper byte F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

How will the lower byte (llH) of Master Volume be handled?

The lower byte (llH) of Master Volume will be handled as 00H.

What is the format for the Identity Request Message [Pro] Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive Message?

Status: F0H 7EH F7H Data byte: 7EH, dev, 06H, 01H, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 7EH: ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message) dev: Device ID (dev: 00H-1FH (1-32), the initial value is 10H (17).) 06H: Sub ID#1 (General Information) 01H: Sub ID#2 (Identity Request) F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

What is “dev”?

The “dev” is the device’s own device number or 7FH (Broadcast).

How can the SC-880 transmit internal settings to other devices?

The SC-880 can use Exclusive messages to transmit internal settings to other devices.

What are the two types of Exclusive data transmission?

There are two types of Exclusive data transmission:

  • Individual Parameter Transmission in which single parameters are transmitted one by one, and
  • Bulk Dump Transmission in which a large amount of data is transmitted at once.

What is the model ID used for exclusive messages conveying data for the GS format?

The exclusive message used when transmitting music file for GS format has a model ID of 42H and a device ID of 10H.

(The SC-880 allows you to change the Device ID setting.)

What model ID number is used for exclusive messages conveying data for the expanded area unique to the SC-880?

Model ID number 45H is used for exclusive messages which convey data for the expanded area unique to the SC-880.

What is the Request data 1 RQ1 (11H) message?

This message requests the other device to send data. The Address and Size determine the type and amount of data to be sent.

What are the two types of requests?

There are two types of requests:

  • Individual Parameter Request which requests data for an individual parameter, and
  • Bulk Dump Request which requests a large amount of data at once.

What message format is used for both Individual Parameter Request and Bulk Dump Request?

In either case, the “Data Request 1 (RQ1)” message format is used, and the Address and Size included in the message determine the type and amount of data that is desired.

Where can more information be found for Individual Parameter Request and Bulk Dump Request?

For Individual Parameter Request, refer to “Section 3, Individual Parameter Transmission.” For Bulk Dump Request, refer to “Section 4. Bulk Dump”.

What happens when a Data Request message is received?

When a Data Request message is received, if the device is ready to transmit data and if the address and size are appropriate, the requested data will be transmitted as a “Data Set 1 (DT1)” message. If not, nothing will be transmitted.

What is the format for the transmission of GS format data?

<MODEL ID = 42H> Status: F0H 41H F7H Data byte: 41H, dev, 42H, 11H, aaH, bbH, ccH, ssH, ttH, uuH, sum, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 41H: ID number (Roland) dev: Device ID (dev: OOH-lFH Initial value is 10H(17)) 42H: Model ID (GS) 11H: Command ID (RQ1) aaH: Address MSD: upper byte of the starting address of the requested data bbH: Address: middle byte of the starting address of the requested data ccH: Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the requested data ssH: Size MSD ttH: Size uuH: Size LSB sum: Checksum F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

What is the format for the transmission of data unique to the SC-880 ?

<MODEL ID = 45H> Status: F0H 41H F7H Data byte: 41H, dev, 45H, 11H, aaH, bbH, ccH, ddH, ssH, ttH, uuH, vvH, sum, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 41H: ID number dev: Device ID (dev: OOH-lFH initial value is 10H(17)) 45H: Model ID (SC-880) 11H: Command ID (RQ1) aaH: Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the requested data bbH: Address ccH: Address ddH: Address LSB:lower byte of the starting address of the requested data ssH: Size MSB ttH: Size uuH: Size vvH: Size LSB sum: Checksum F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

What determines the amount of data that can be transmitted at once?

The amount of data that can be transmitted at once will depend on the type of data, and data must be requested using a specific starting address and size.

What is Data set 1 DT1(12H)?

This is the message that actually performs data transmission, and is used when you wish to transmit the data.

What is the format for the transmission of GS format data?

<MODEL ID = 42H> Status: F0H 41H F7H Data byte: 41H, dev, 42H, 12H, aaH, bbH, ccH, ddH, … eeH, sum, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 41H: ID number (Roland) dev: Device ID (dev: OOH – 1FH Initial value is 10H(17)) 42H: Model ID (GS) 12H: Command ID (DT1) aaH: Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the transmitted data bbH: Address: middle byte of the starting address of the transmitted data ccH: Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the transmitted data ddH: Data: the actual data to be transmitted. Multiple bytes of data are transmitted starting from the address. …eeH: Data sum: Checksum F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

What is the format for the transmission of data unique to the SC-880 ?

<MODEL ID= 45H> Status: F0H 41H F7H Data byte: 41H, dev, 45H, 12H, aaH, bbH, ccH, ddH, eeH, … ffH, sum, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 41H: ID number (Roland) dev: Device ID (dev: OOH – IFH Initial value is 10H(17)) 45H: Model ID (SC-880) 12H: Command ID (DT1) aaH: Address MSB:upper byte of the starting address of the transmitted data bbH: Address ccH: Address ddH: Address LSB:lower byte of the starting address of the transmitted data eeH: Data: the actual data to be transmitted. Multiple bytes of data are transmitted starting from the address. …ffH: Data sum: Checksum F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

What determines the amount of data that can be transmitted at one time?

The amount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data, and data can be received only from the specified starting address and size.

How is data larger than 128 bytes handled?

Data larger than 128 bytes must be divided into packets of 128 bytes or less.

What is the minimum interval between packets if “Data Set 1” is transmitted successively?

If “Data Set 1” is transmitted successively, there must be an interval of at least 40 ms between packets.

What is the status of the Active Sensing System Realtime Message?

Status: FEH

How often is Active Sensing transmitted?

This will be transmitted constantly at intervals of approximately 250 ms.

What are the only System Exclusive messages transmitted by the SC-880?

“Identity Reply” and “Data Set 1 (DTl)” are the only System Exclusive messages transmitted by the SC-880.

When will the requested internal data be transmitted?

When an appropriate “Identity Request Message” and “Data Request 1 (RQ1)” message are received, the requested internal data will be transmitted.

What is the format for Identity Reply ?

Status: F0H 7EH F7H Data byte: 7EH, dev, 06H, 02H, 41H, 42H, 00H, 00H, 04H, 04H, 00H, 00H, 00H, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 7EH: ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message) dev: Device ID (use the same as the device ID of Roland) 06H: Sub ID#1 (General Information) 02H: Sub ID#2 (Identity Reply) 41H: ID number (Roland) 42H: Device family code (GS) 00H: Device family code (MSB) 00H: Device family number code (LSB) 04H: Device family number code (MSB) 04H: Software revision level 00H: Software revision level 00H: Software revision level 00H: Software revision level F7H: EOX (End of Exclusive)

When will the device reply to the message by the unique device ID (dev)?

Reply to the message by the unique device ID (dev) when the device has received the “Identity Request Message” in the Broadcast.

What is the format for the transmission of GS format data using Data set 1 DT1 (12H)?

<MODEL ID= 42H> Status: F0H 41H F7H Data byte: 41H, dev, 42H, 12H, aaH, bbH, ccH, ddH, … eeH, sum, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 41H: ID number (Roland) dev: Device ID (dev: OOH-lFH, Initial value is 10H) 42H: Model ID (GS) 12H: Command ID (DT1) aaH: Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent bbH: Address: middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ccH: Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ddH: Data: the actual data to be sent. Multiple bytes of data are transmitted in order starting from the address …eeH: Data sum: Checksum F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

What is the format for the transmission of data unique to the SC-880 using Data set 1 DT1 (12H)?

<MODEL ID= 45H> Status: F0H 41H F7H Data byte: 41H, dev, 45H, 12H, aaH, bbH, ccH, ddH, eeH, … ffH, sum, F7H Explanation: F0H: Exclusive status 41H: ID number (Roland) dev: Device ID (dev: OOH-lFH, Initial value is 10H) 45H: Model ID (SC-880) 12H: Command ID (DT1) aaH: Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent bbH: Address ccH: Address ddH: Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent eeH: Data: the actual data to be sent. Multiple bytes of data are transmitted in order starting from the address …ffH: Data sum: Checksum F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)

What determines the amount of data that can be transmitted at one time?

The amount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data, and data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size.

How is data larger than 128 bytes handled?

Data larger than 128 bytes will be divided into packets of 128 bytes or less, and each packet will be sent at an interval of about 40 ms.

What are the two ways in which GS data is transmitted?

There are two ways in which GS data is transmitted:

  • Individual Parameter Transmission in which individual parameters are transmitted one by one, and
  • Bulk Dump Transmission in which a large amount of data is transmitted at once.

What does Individual Parameter Transmission do?

Individual Parameter Transmission transmits data (or requests data) for one parameter as one exclusive message (one packet of “F0 … F7”).

What must be used in Individual Parameter Transmission?

In Individual Parameter Transmission, you must use the Address and Size listed in the following “Parameter Address Map”. Addresses marked at “#” cannot be used as starting addresses.

What is the Address Block map for Model ID = 42H via Port-A?

Address (H) Block
00 00 00 SYSTEM
20 00 00 USER TONE BANK
21 00 00 USER RHYTHM SET
22 00 00 USER MULTI-FX
23 00 00 USER PATCH COMMON (U-001…U-016)
24 00 00 USER PATCH PART (Block 01) (U-001 … 016)
25 00 00 USER PATCH PART (Block 01) (U-001 … 016)
26 00 00 USER PATCH PART (Block 02) (U-001 … 016)
27 00 00 USER PATCH PART (Block 02) (U-001…016)
40 00 00 PERFORMANCE COMMON #A
40 10 00 PERFORMANCE PART (Block 00-0F) A
41 00 00 RHYTHM SETUP A
50 10 00 PERFORMANCE PART (Block 10-1F)
51 00 00 RHYTHM SETUP B

What blocks cannot be accessed in Mode-1 (Single Module mode)?

The blocks displayed in gray cannot be accessed in Mode-1 (Single Module mode).

What are the parameter blocks listed as “#A”?

Blocks listed as “#A” are parameter blocks which are common to the entire device in Mode-1, and valid only for Parts A01-A16 in Mode-2 (Double Module mode).

What is the Address Block map for Model ID = 42H via Port-B?

Address (H) Block
00 00 00 SYSTEM
20 00 00 USER TONE BANK
21 00 00 USER RHYTHM SET (U-1:065, U-2:066)
22 00 00 USER MULTI-FX
23 00 00 USER PATCH COMMON (U-001…U-016)
24 00 00 USER PATCH PART (Block 01) (U-001 … 016)
25 00 00 USER PATCH PART (Block 01) (U-001 … 016)
26 00 00 USER PATCH PART (Block 02) (U-001 … 016)
27 00 00 USER PATCH PART (Block 02) (U-001…016)
40 00 00 PERFORMANCE COMMON #B
40 10 00 PERFORMANCE PART (Block 10-1F) B
41 00 00 RHYTHM SETUP B
50 00 00 PERFORMANCE PART (Block 00-0F) A
50 10 00 RHYTHM SETUP A

What blocks cannot be accessed in Mode-1 (Single Module mode)?

The blocks displayed in gray cannot be accessed in Mode-1 (Single Module mode).

What are the parameter blocks listed as “#B”?

Blocks listed as “#B” are parameter blocks which are common to the entire device in Mode-1, and valid only for Parts B01 – B16 in Mode-2 (Double-Module mode).

What is the Address Block map for Model ID = 45H?

Address (H) Block
50 00 00 00 USER PERFORMANCE SYSTEM A
51 00 00 00 USER PERFORMANCE COMMON A
52 00 00 00 USER PERFORMANCE COMMON B
53 00 00 00 USER PERFORMANCE PART A
54 00 00 00 USER PERFORMANCE PART B
61 00 00 00 USER PATCH COMMON
63 00 00 00 USER PATCH PART
70 00 00 00 USER RHYTHM SET

What is the parameter block, User Performance Common A?

The parameter block User Performance Common A is shared by the entire instrument in mode-1 (Single Module Mode), and is valid only for parts A01-A16 in mode-2 (Double Module Mode).

What does the Parameter address map indicate?

This map indicates the address, size, Data (range), Parameter, Description, and Default Value of parameters which can be transferred using “Request data 1 (RQ1)” and “Data Set 1 (DT1)”.

How are the numbers of address, size, Data, and Default Value indicated?

All the numbers of address, size, Data, and Default Value are indicated in 7-bit Hexadecimal form.

How are numbers in the explanatory column given?

Numbers in the explanatory column are given in decimal notation.

What parameters are not given in this map?

The MODEL ID = 42H parameters at address 5* … 0 are not given in this map. The parameters for address 5* … 0 … are the same format as those at address 4* … 0 …

What parameters for MODEL ID = 45H are not listed in this map?

Parameters of addresses 52 … 0 … 0 and 54 … 0 … 0 for MODEL ID = 45H are not listed in this map. Parameters of addresses 52 … 0 … 0 … are in the same format as addresses 51 … 0 … 0 … Parameters of addresses 54 … 0 … 0 … are in the same format as addresses 53 … 0 … 0 …

What are System Parameters ?

Parameters affecting the entire unit, such as how the two MIDI IN connectors will function, are called System Parameters.

What is the data for SYSTEM MODE SET ?

Refer to “System exclusive messages related to Mode settings”.

What is the Default Value and Description for CHANNEL MSG RX PORT ?

Data (H) Default Value (H) Description
00 00 MODE-1 (Single module mode)
01 – MODE-2 (Double module mode)

What is the description for CHANNEL MSG RX PORT ?

(Rx. only) You can modify the receiving MIDI port at which channel messages will be received for each BLOCK. It is suggested that normally you use PORT A for BLOCK 00-0F, and PORT B for BLOCK 10-1F. (In this case there is no need to change the setting.)

What are Performance Common parameters?

In MODE-1 (Single module mode), the SC-880 functions as a single sound source module with 32 Parts. In MODE-2 (Double module mode), it functions as two sound source modules with 16 Parts each. The parameters common to all Parts in each module are called Performance Common parameters.

What is the description and Default Value for MASTER TUNE?

Description: -100.0 – +100.0 [cent] Use nibblized data. Default Value (H): 00 04 00 00

What is the description and Default Value for MASTER VOLUME?

Description: 0-127 (=F0 7F 7F 04 01 00, vv F7) Default Value (H): 7F

What is the description and Default Value for MASTER KEY-SHIFT?

Description: -24 – +24 [semitones] Default Value (H): 40

What is the description and Default Value for MASTER PAN?

Description: -63 (LEFT) – +63 (RIGHT) Default Value (H): 40

What is the description and Default Value for MODE SET?

Description: 00 = GS Reset (Rx. only) Refer to “System exclusive messages related to Mode settings”. Default Value (H): 00

What is the description and Default Value for PATCH NAME?

Description: 16 ASCII Characters Default Value (H): –

What is the description and Default Value for REVERB MACRO?

Description: 00: Room 1, 01: Room 2, 02: Room 3, 03: Hall 1, 04: Hall 2, 05: Plate, 06: Delay, 07: Panning Delay Default Value (H): 04

What is the description and Default Value for REVERB CHARACTER?

Description: 0-7 Default Value (H): 04

What is the description and Default Value for REVERB PRE-LPF?

Description: 0-7 Default Value (H): 06

What is the description and Default Value for REVERB LEVEL?

Description: 0-127 Default Value (H): 64

What is the description and Default Value for REVERB TIME?

Description: 0-127 Default Value (H): 64

What is the description and Default Value for REVERB DELAY FEEDBACK?

Description: 0-127 Default Value (H): 00

What is the description and Default Value for REVERB PREDELAY TIME ?

Description: 0-127 [msec] Default Value (H): 00

What is REVERB MACRO?

REVERB MACRO is a macro parameter that allows global setting of reverb parameters. When you select the reverb type with REVERB MACRO, each reverb parameter will be set to the most suitable value.

What is a User Tone?

You can modify the parameters of the SC-880 sound to your taste, and save your new settings in Variation numbers 64 or 65 of the Tone Set 2/3. A sound saved in this way is called a User Tone. You can save 256 different sounds in this way. The parameters you can set are Vibrato, Filter and Envelope.

What is a User Rhythm Set?

The values of rhythm sound parameters can be modified as desired and stored as a Rhythm Set. A Rhythm Set that was stored in this way is referred to as a User Rhythm Set. Sixteen Rhythm Sets can be stored. A User Rhythm Set can be given an original name. These are stored in Rhythm Set numbers 65–80 of TONE SET 2/3. Addresses 21 …. below can receive rhythm set data for rhythm set numbers 65 and 66. To receive data for rhythm set numbers 67–80, use addresses 70 …. with <Model ID = 45H>.

What is a User Effect?

You can modify the Multi-Effect parameters as desired and store them as an Effect Type. Effect Types that are stored in this way are referred to as User Effects. 64 different Effect Types can be stored. These are stored in Effect Type numbers 40 00H through 40 3FH.

What is a User Patch?

Addresses 23 …. below allow you to modify the values of the performance common parameters and all performance part parameters (PART1 and PART2 only), and save them as a patch. A patch that has been saved in this way is called a User Patch. 128 user patches can be saved. Addresses 23 …. can receive data only for PART1 and PART2 of user patches U-001–U-016. To receive data for user patches U-017–U-128, use addresses 61 …. with <Model ID = 45H>.

What is a User Performance?

The values of all System, Performance Common and Performance Part parameters can be modified as desired and stored as a Performance. A Performance that has been stored in this way is called a User Performance. Eight User Performances can be stored.

What is the relation between Part number and Block number?

The relation between Part number and Block number is as follows:

  • x = BLOCK NUMBER (0–F)
  • Part 1 (default MIDI ch = 1) x=1
  • Part 2 (default MIDI ch = 2) x=2
  • Part 9 (default MIDI ch = 9) x=9
  • Part 10 (default MIDI ch = 10) x=0
  • Part 11 (default MIDI ch = 11) x=A
  • Part 12 (default MIDI ch = 12) x=B
  • Part 16 (default MIDI ch = 16) x=F

What is the relation between Part number and Block number?

The relation between Part number and Block number is as follows:

  • x…BLOCK NUMBER (1-6),
  • Part 1 (default MIDI ch = 1) x=1
  • Part 2 (default MIDI ch = 2) x=2
  • Part 6 (default MIDI ch = 6) x=6

In the case of Mode 2 (Double module mode), can the Multi-effects be used for Parts with a CHANNEL MSG RX PORT setting of PORT B?

No. In the case of Mode 2 (Double module mode), the Multi-effects cannot be used for Parts with a CHANNEL MSG RX PORT setting of PORT B.

In the case of Mode 2 (Double module mode), can the Multi-effect be used for Ports with a CHANNEL MSG RX PORT setting of PORT B?

No. In the case of Mode 2 (Double Module mode), the Multi-effect cannot be used for Ports with a CHANNEL MSG RX PORT setting of PORT B.

In MODE-2 (Double module mode), can CHORUS SEND LEVEL TO DELAY be used?

No. In MODE-2 (Double module mode), CHORUS SEND LEVEL TO DELAY cannot be used.

In MODE-2 (Double module mode), can DELAY SEND LEVEL be used?

No. In MODE-2 (Double module mode), DELAY SEND LEVEL cannot be used.

In MODE-2 (Double module mode), can DELAY be used?

No. In MODE-2 (Double module mode), DELAY cannot be used.

In MODE-2 (Double module mode), can REVERB PREDELAY TIME be used?

No. In MODE-2 (Double module mode), REVERB PREDELAY TIME cannot be used.

In MODE-2 (Double module mode), can EQ be used?

No. In MODE-2 (Double module mode), EQ(equalizer) cannot be used.

What is the CHORUS SEND LEVEL?

0–127

What is the REVERB SEND LEVEL?

0–127

What is the RX BANK SELECT?

OFF/ON

What is the RX BANK SELECT LSB?

OFF/ON

What is the PITCH BANE TUNE?

–100–0–+100 (cent)

What is the DELAY SEND LEVEL?

0–127. In MODE-2 (Double module mode), DELAY SEND LEVEL cannot be used.

What is TONE MODIFY1?

–64–+63, Vibrato Rate

What is TONE MODIFY2?

–64–+63, Vibrato Depth

What is TONE MODIFY3?

–64–+63, TVF Cutoff Freq

What is TONE MODIFY4?

–64–+63, TVF Resonance

What is TONE MODIFY5?

–64–+63, TVF&TVA Env. Attack

What is TONE MODIFY6?

–64–+63, TVF&TVA Env. Decay

What is TONE MODIFY7?

–64–+63, TVF&TVA Env. Release

What is TONE MODIFY8?

–64–+63, Vibrato Delay

What is the SCALE TUNING C?

–64–+63 (cent)

What is the SCALE TUNING B?

–64–+63 (cent)

What is the MOD PITCH CONTROL?

–24–+24 (semitones)

What is the MOD TVF CUTOFF CONTROL?

–9600–+9600 (cent)

What is the MOD AMPLITUDE CONTROL?

–100.0–+100.0 (%)

What is the MOD LFO RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the MOD LFO1 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the MOD LFO1 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the MOD LFO1 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the MOD LFO2 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the MOD LFO2 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the MOD LFO2 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the MOD LFO2 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the BEND PITCH CONTROL?

0–24 (semitones)

What is the BEND TVF CUTOFF CONTROL?

–9600–+9600 (cent)

What is the BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL?

–100.0–+100.0 (%)

What is the BEND LFO1 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the BEND LFO1 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the BEND LFO1 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the BEND LFO1 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the BEND LFO2 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the BEND LFO2 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the BEND LFO2 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the BEND LFO2 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the CA1 PITCH CONTROL?

–24–+24 (semitones)

What is the CA1 TVF CUTOFF CONTROL?

–9600–+9600 (cent)

What is the CA1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL?

–100.0–+100.0 (%)

What is the CA1 LFO1 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the CA1 LFO1 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the CA1 LFO1 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the CA1 LFO1 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the CA1 LFO2 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the CA1 LFO2 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the CA1 LFO2 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the CA1 LFO2 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the PA1 PITCH CONTROL?

–24–+24 (semitones)

What is the PA1 TVF CUTOFF CONTROL?

–9600–+9600 (cent)

What is the PA1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL?

–100.0–+100.0 (%)

What is the PA1 LFO1 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the PA1 LFO1 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the PA1 LFO1 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the PA1 LFO1 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the PA1 LFO2 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the PA1 LFO2 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the PA1 LFO2 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the PA1 LFO2 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the CC1 PITCH CONTROL?

–24–+24 (semitones)

What is the CC1 TVF CUTOFF CONTROL?

–9600–+9600 (cent)

What is the CC1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL?

–100.0–+100.0 (%)

What is the CC1 LFO1 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the CC1 LFO1 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the CC1 LFO1 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the CC1 LFO1 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the CC1 LFO2 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the CC1 LFO2 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the CC1 LFO2 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the CC1 LFO2 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the CC2 PITCH CONTROL?

–24–+24 (semitones)

What is the CC2 TVF CUTOFF CONTROL?

–9600–+9600 (cent)

What is the CC2 AMPLITUDE CONTROL?

–100.0–+100.0 (%)

What is the CC2 LFO1 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the CC2 LFO1 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the CC2 LFO1 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the CC2 LFO1 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the CC2 LFO2 RATE CONTROL?

–10.0–+10.0 (Hz)

What is the CC2 LFO2 PITCH DEPTH?

0–600 (cent)

What is the CC2 LFO2 TVF DEPTH?

0–2400 (cent)

What is the CC2 LFO2 TVA DEPTH?

0–100.0 (%)

What is the TONE SET NUMBER?

TONESET0–3

What is the TONE SET-0 NUMBER?

TONE SET 1–TONE SET 3

What is the EQ ON/OFF?

OFF/ON

What is the OUTPUT ASSIGN?

OUTPUT-1–OUTPUT-2R

What is the PART M-FX ASSIGN?

BYPASS–M-FX

How can I store the values of rhythm sound parameters?

The values of rhythm sound parameters can be modified as desired and stored as a Rhythm Set.

What are User Rhythm Sets?

A Rhythm Set that was stored in this way is referred to as a User Rhythm Set. Sixteen Rhythm Sets can be stored. A User Rhythm Set can be given an original name. These are stored in Rhythm Set numbers 65–80 of TONE SET 2/3.

What is the USER RHYTHM SET NAME?

32–127 (ASCII 12 characters)

What is the PLAY NOTE?

0–127

What is the LEVEL?

0–127

What is the ASSIGN GROUP?

0–127

What is the PAN?

0–127

What is the REVERB SEND LEVEL?

0–127

What is the CHORUS SEND LEVEL?

0–127

What is the RX NOTE OFF?

OFF/ON

What is the RX NOTE ON?

OFF/ON

What is the DELAY SEND LEVEL?

0–127

What is the SOURCE RHYTHM SET# (TONE SET)?

1–3

What is the (PG#: Program number)?

0–127

What is the SOURCE NOTE NUMBER?

0–127

What is Bulk Dump?

Bulk Dump allows you to transmit a large amount of data at once, and is convenient for storing settings for the entire unit on a computer of sequencer.

How do you perform a Bulk Dump transmission?

To make the SC-880 perform a Bulk Dump transmission, send it a “Bulk Dump Request” message. Bulk Dump Request uses the Data Request 1 (RQ1) format, but unlike when transmitting individual parameters, the “Size” specified by the request message refers not to size of the data but rather specifics the contents of the data.

Where can I find the data contents corresponding to each size?

For the data contents corresponding to each Size, refer to “Parameter Dump”.

What happens when the SC-880 receives a Bulk Dump Request?

When the SC-880 receives a Bulk Dump Request, it will transmit a Bulk Dump in the format given below.

What is another function the SC-880 is able to transmit?

The SC-880 is also able to transmit a list of its internal sounds. This function can be used to display a list of sounds on a computer.

What do Bulk Dump data consist of?

Bulk Dump data consists of system exclusive messages, and contains a model ID that is specific to the instrument.

What model ID numbers does the SC-880 use?

The SC-880 uses two models ID numbers:

  • “MODEL ID= 42H” which is common to all GS instruments
  • “MODEL ID= 45H” which is specific to the SC-880

What happens when “Bulk Mode” is set to “Original”?

When “Bulk Mode” (p. 93) is set to “Original”, bulk dump data will be transmitted with a model ID number of 42H for the portion which is common to GS instruments, and with a model ID number of 45H for the portion which has been extended on the SC-880.

What should I set this parameter to for normal use?

For normal use, you should set this parameter to “Original.”

What happens when “Bulk Mode” is set to “GS Compatible”?

When “Bulk Mode” is set to “GS Compatible”, bulk dump data will be transmitted with a model ID number of 42H for the portion which is common to GS instruments, and the portion which has been extended on the SC-880 will not be transmitted.

When should I use the “GS Compatible” setting?

Use the “GS Compatible” setting when you are creating song data intended for playback on a GS instrument, or song data for playback on the SC-88/SC-88Pro.

How is data received and transmitted for the portion which has been extended on the SC-880?

Data is received and transmitted as individual Parameter data with MODEL ID=45H.

What is Parameter dump request?

This is a command that requests a set of parameter data, and uses “Data Request 1 (RQ1)” format. The Size specifies the requested data contents.

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of all parameters?

Address: 0C0000, Size: 000000

When should you use the request a dump of all parameters?

Use this when not using USER TONE BANK or USER RHYTHM SET.

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of all parameters except for USER TONE BANK and USER RHYTHM SET settings that have not been modified?

Address: 0C0001, Size: 000001

When should you use the request a dump of all parameters except for USER TONE BANK and USER RHYTHM SET settings that have not been modified?

Use this when USER TONE BANK, USER RHYTHM SET and RHYTHM SETUP settings have not been modified.

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of all parameters for 16 parts only?

Address: 0C0002, Size: 000002

When should you use the request a dump of all parameters for 16 parts only?

Use this when using only 16 Parts.

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of all parameters for 16 parts only where RHYTHM SETUP settings that have not been modified?

Address: 0C0010, Size: 000010

When should you use the request a dump of all parameters for 16 parts only where RHYTHM SETUP settings have not been modified?

Use this when using only 16 Parts, and RHYTHM SETUP settings have not been modified.

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of all USER TONE BANK data?

Address: 0C0100, Size: 000100

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of USER TONE BANK #64 data (128 sounds)?

Address: 0C0140, Size: 000140

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of USER TONE BANK #65 data (128 sounds)?

Address: 0C0141, Size: 000141

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of all USER RHYTHM SET #64 and #65 data?

Address: 0C0200, Size: 000200

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of USER RHYTHM SET #64 data?

Address: 0C0240, Size: 000240

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of USER RHYTHM SET #65 data?

Address: 0C0241, Size: 000241

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of USER M-FX data?

Address: 0C0300, Size: 000300

What is the Address and Size for requesting a dump of USER PATCH (Only for Part 1 and Part 2 of U-001 through U-016) data?

Address: 0C0400, Size: 000400

Can you give an example dump request for all parameters?

F0 41 DEV 42 11 0C 00 00 00 00 00 74 F7

Is using ALL (00 00 00) always recommended?

Normally, using ALL (00 00 00) provides the greatest predictability, but the amount of data is very large, and transmission requires approximately 15 seconds. In order to reduce transmission time and data volume, we suggest that you request a dump only of the necessary data.

What do panel button operations allow you to transmit dumps of?

Panel button operations allow you to transmit dumps of ALL, ALL 1, 16-part GS 1, 16-part GS 2, USER TONE BANK (ALL), USER RHYTHM SET (ALL), USER M-FX, USER PATCH.

What is a Parameter dump?

When a Parameter Dump Request is received, or when panel operations initiate a dump transmission, the following data will be transmitted in “Data Set 1 (DT1)” format.

What is the Address and Description of USER M-FX #1–16?

Address: 2A 00 00–2A 0F 7F, Description: USER M-FX #1–16

What is the Address and Description of USER PATCH #1–16?

Address: 2B 00 00–2B 5F 7F, Description: USER PATCH #1–16

What is the Address and Description of SETUP 1?

Address: 08 00 00–08 00 7F, Description: SETUP 1

What is the Address and Description of USER TONE BANK #64?

Address: 28 0A 00–28 1A 7F, Description: USER TONE BANK #64

What is the Address and Description of USER TONE BANK #65?

Address: 28 1B 00–28 2B 7F, Description: USER TONE BANK #65

What is the Address and Description of USER RHYTHM SET #65?

Address: 29 00 00–29 0D 0F, Description: USER RHYTHM SET #65

What is the Address and Description of USER RHYTHM SET #66?

Address: 29 10 00–29 1B 0F, Description: USER RHYTHM SET #66

What is the Address and Description of PERFORMANCE EXTENSION A?

Address: 48 2D 00–48 26 0F, Description: PERFORMANCE EXTENSION A

What is the Address and Description of SYSTEM/PERFORMANCE A?

Address: 48 00 00–48 1D 0F, Description: SYSTEM/PERFORMANCE A

What is the Address and Description of RHYTHM SETUP A?

Address: 49 00 00–49 1F 7F, Description: RHYTHM SETUP A

What is the Address and Description of PERFORMANCE EXTENSION B?

Address: 58 2D 00–58 26 0F, Description: PERFORMANCE EXTENSION B

What is the Address and Description of SYSTEM/PERFORMANCE B?

Address: 58 00 00–58 1D 0F, Description: SYSTEM/PERFORMANCE B

What is the Address and Description of RHYTHM SETUP B?

Address: 59 00 00–59 1F 7F, Description: RHYTHM SETUP B

Where can I find the data contents that will be transmitted when panel buttons are used to request a dump?

This table lists the data contents that will be transmitted when panel buttons are used to request a dump, or when a Parameter Dump Request is received at MIDI IN A. When a Parameter Dump Request is received at MIDI IN B, A and B will be reversed for PERFORMANCE EXTENSION, SYSTEM/PERFORMANCE and RHYTHM SETUP.

What should I be aware of when data dumped by the SC-880 is reloaded into the SC-880?

When data dumped by the SC-880 is reloaded into the SC-880, be aware that the data may not be set correctly if:

  • the transmission order of the packets is changed,
  • the time interval between packets is changed,
  • other messages are inserted between packets.

Is the Parameter Dump data of the SC-880 compatible with GS format compatible devices?

The Parameter Dump data of the SC-880 includes data for GS format compatible devices, and this data is compatible in both directions. However, depending on the settings of parameters which are newly extended on the SC-880, the musical result may differ.

What should I do if the SC-880 does not operate correctly with Bulk Dump data from another GS format compatible device?

If the SC-880 does not operate correctly with Bulk Dump data from another GS format compatible device, first initialize the SC-880 (page 104) before retransmitting the data.

What might happen when another GS format compatible device receives Parameter Dump data that was transmitted by the SC-880?

When another GS format compatible device receives Parameter Dump data that was transmitted by the SC-880, it may display a message such as “Address Error”, but this is because the parameter addresses newly extended on the SC-880 were not recognized by the other device. Parameters which could be recognized by that device have been correctly set.

What is Tone list dump request?

This command requests a bulk dump of a list of the preset sounds (Tones) in internal memory, and uses “Data Request 1 (RQ1)” format. The Size specifies the contents of the requested data.

What is the Address for a Tone list dump request?

0C 00 01

What is the Size for a Tone list dump request for ALL?

00 00 00

What is the Size for a Tone list dump request for TONESET1?

00 00 01

What is the Size for a Tone list dump request for TONESET2?

00 00 02

What is the Size for a Tone list dump request for TONESET3?

00 00 03

What is Tone list dump?

When Tone List Dump Request is received, the sound names of the specified tone set will be transmitted continuously in the format given below, where 16 bytes are used for each sound name. The Address of the transmitted data is OC: 00 01 for all packets. User bank sound names are not transmitted.

What is the DUMP FORMAT for Tone list dump?

CC0 TONE-SET PC 00 TONE NAME (ASCII 12 Characters), CC0: Variation number, TONE SET: TONE SET number 01 = TONE SET 1, 02 = TONE SET 2, 03 = TONE SET 3, PC: Program number.

What is Rhythm set list dump request?

This command requests a bulk dump transmission of a list of Preset Rhythm Sets in internal memory, and uses “Data Request 1 (RQ1)” format. The Size specifies the desired data contents.

What is the Address for a Rhythm set list dump request?

0C 00 02

What is the Size for a Rhythm set list dump request for ALL?

00 00 00

What is the Size for a Rhythm set list dump request for TONESET1?

00 00 01

What is the Size for a Rhythm set list dump request for TONESET2?

00 00 02

What is the Size for a Rhythm set list dump request for TONESET3?

00 00 03

What is Rhythm set list dump?

When a Rhythm Set List Dump Request is received, the Rhythm Set names of the specified TONE SET will be transmitted successively in the format given below, where 16 bytes are used for each sound. The Address of the transmitted data will be OC 00 02 for each packet.

What is the DUMP FORMAT for Rhythm set list dump?

CC0 TONE-SET PC 00 RHYTHM SET NAME (ASCII 12 Characters), TONE SET: TONE SET number 01 = TONE SET 1, 02 = TONE SET 2, 03 = TONE SET 3, PC: Program number.

What is Rhythm tone list dump request?

This command requests a bulk dump transmission of the Tone list of an internal Preset Rhythm Sets, and uses “Data Request 1 (RQ1)” format. The Size specifies the desired data contents.

What is the Address for a Rhythm tone list dump request?

0C 00 03

What is Rhythm tone list dump?

When a Rhythm Tone List Dump Request is received, the Rhythm Tone names of the specified Rhythm Set will be transmitted in the following format where 16 bytes are used for each Rhythm Tone name. The address of the transmitted data will be OC 00 03 for each packet.

What is the DUMP FORMAT for a Rhythm tone list dump?

CC0 TONE-SET PC KEY RHYTHM TONE NAME (ASCII 12 Characters), TONE SET: TONE SET number 01 = TONE SET 1, 02 = TONE SET 2, 03 = TONE SET 3, PC: Program number, KEY: Note number.

What is Multi effects list dump request?

This command requests a bulk dump transmission of the Multi effects list of an internal memory, and uses “Data Request 1 (RQ1)” format. The Size specifies the desired data contents.

What is the Address for a Multi effects list dump request?

0C 00 04

What is the Size for a Multi effects list dump request for ALL?

00 00 00

What is Multi effects list dump?

When a Multi effects List Dump Request is received, the specified Multi effects names will be transmitted in the following format where 20 bytes are used for each Effect name. The address of the transmitted data will be OC 00 04 for each packet.

What is the DUMP FORMAT for a Multi effects list dump?

MULTI-FX NAME (ASCII 16 Characters), MSB: Category, LSB: Type

What is Preset patch list dump request?

This command requests a bulk dump transmission of the Preset patch list of an internal memory, and uses “Data Request 1 (RQ1)” format. The Size specifies the desired data contents.

What is the Address for a Preset patch list dump request?

0C 00 05

What is the Size for a Preset patch list dump request for ALL?

00 00 00

What is Preset patch list dump?

When a Preset Patch List Dump Request is received, the specified Preset patch names will be transmitted in the following format where 20 bytes are used for each Patch name. The address of the transmitted data will be OC 00 05 for each packet.

What is the DUMP FORMAT for a Preset patch list dump?

PATCH NAME (ASCII 16 Characters), PC: Program number.

How are data values and address/sizes of exclusive messages expressed?

In MIDI documentation, data values and addresses/sizes of exclusive messages etc. are expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits.

How are decimal values such as MIDI channel, bank number and program number listed?

Decimal values such as MIDI channel, bank number and program number are listed as one greater than the values given in the above table.

How many steps can a 7-bit byte express?

A 7-bit byte can express data in the range of 128 steps.

What happens when greater precision is required?

For data where greater precision is required, we must use two or more bytes.

What is the decimal expression of two hexadecimal numbers aa bbH expressing two 7-bit bytes?

For example, two hexadecimal numbers aa bbH expressing two 7-bit bytes would indicate a value of aa x 128 + bb.

How do you calculate values with a sign?

In the case of values which have a sign, 80H = –64, 00H = +0, and 7FH = +63, so that the decimal expression would be 64 less than the value given in the above chart. In the case of two types, 00 00H = –8192, 40 00H = +0, and 7F 7FH = +8191. For example, if aa bbH were expressed as decimal, this would be aa bbH – 40 00H = aa x 128 + bb – 64 x 128.

How is nibbled data expressed?

Data marked “Use nibbled data” is expressed in hexadecimal in 4-bit units.

What is the value of a value expressed as a 2-byte nibble 0a 0bH?

A value expressed as a 2-byte nibble 0a 0bH has the value of a x 16 + b.

What is the decimal expression of 5AH?

90

What is the decimal expression of the value 12 34H given as hexadecimal for each 7 bits?

2356

What is the decimal expression of the nibbled value 0A 03 09 0D?

41885

What is the nibbled expression of the decimal value 1258?

00 04 0E 0AH

What is “SP”?

“SP” is space.

What does the MIDI message “92 3E 5F” mean?

9n is the Note-on status, and n is the MIDI channel number. Since 2H = 2, 3EH = 62, and 5FH = 95, this is a Note-on message with MIDI CH = 3, note number 62 (note name is D4), and velocity 95.

What does the MIDI message “0E 49” mean?

CnH is the Program Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. Since EH = 14 and 49H = 73, this is a Program Change message with MIDI CH = 15, program number 74 (Flute in GS).

What does the MIDI message “EA 00 28” mean?

EnH is the Pitch Bend Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. The 2nd byte (00H = 0) is the LSB and the 3rd byte (28H = 40) is the MSB, but Pitch Bend Value is a signed number in which 40 00H (= 64 x 128 + 80 = 8192) is 0, so this Pitch Bend Value is 28 00H – 40 00H = –40 x 128 + 80 – (64 x 128 + 80) = 5120 – 8192 = –3072. If the Pitch Bend Sensitivity is set to 2 semitones, 8192 (00 00H) will cause the pitch to change –200 cents, so in this case –200 x (–3072 / 8192) = +75 cents of Pitch Bend is being applied to MIDI

What should you do when you need repair service?

Call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor.

What should you do if the battery is incorrectly replaced?

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

What should you do if your equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions?

You can try one of the following measures to correct the interference:

  • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
  • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
  • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
  • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

What can void the user’s authority to operate this equipment?

Unauthorized changes or modification to the system.

What do you need to meet FCC class B Limit?

Shielded interlace cables.

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD ROLAND SC-880 (01) PDF MANUAL

Visitors also searched:

  1. ROLAND JUPITER-8 (01) PDF MANUAL
  2. ROLAND SOUNDCANVAS SC-88 (01) PDF MANUAL
  3. XANTREX 880-1260-12 (01) PDF MANUAL
  4. XANTREX 880-0630-24 (01) PDF MANUAL
  5. AKG EMOTION D 880 (01) PDF Document
  6. ROLAND TR-808 (03) PDF MANUAL
  7. BERNINA 880 PLUS (01) PDF Document
  8. AUDIOLINE AB 880 (01) PDF Document
  9. XANTREX 880-0315-51 (01) PDF MANUAL
  10. AKG EMOTION D 880 S (01) PDF Document

Leave comments, questions, reviews, tips, tricks, hacks or page errors below. Account not required.